New9000English Mannual PDF

EXC9000 STATIC EXCITATION
SYSTEM
USERS’ MANUAL
GUANGZHOU ELECTRICAL APARATUS

RESEARCH INSTITUTE
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Brief introduction
Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Preword ..................................................................................... 2
Chapter 1 Brief introduction ................................................... 4
Chapter 2 System composition ................................................ 4
Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations .......... 4
Chapter 4 Human-machine interface...................................... 4
Chapter 5 Regulation software ................................................ 5
Chapter 6 Installation guide .................................................... 5
Chapter 7 Commissioning........................................................ 5
Chapter 8 Operation................................................................. 5
Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting........................ 6
Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system........... 6
Chapter 11 Electronic braking function ................................. 6
Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control ....................... 6
1-1
Preword
EXC9000 total-digital excitation system is the 4th generation of micro-computer
excitation system, developed by Guangzhou electric Aparatus Institute/ Gunagzhou
KINTE ELECTRIC CONTROL CO.LTD. EXC9000 is characterized mainly by
function software & system digitization. Digitization of EXC9000 system shows not
only in regulator, but also in rectifier cubicle and de-excitation cubicle. Intelligent
detecting, intelligent display, intelligent control, information intelligent transmission
and intelligent testing can be realized in various parts of the excitation system, which
greatly improves its reliability and techniques.
This system absorbs advanced research findings and techniques in the current
digital control area in addition to novel extricate solutions such as DSP digital signal
processing, controlled silicon commutator automatic balancing technique ,
high-frequency pulse array triggering technique, low voltage residual quick flashing
technique, complete communication function and intelligentized regulation method
etc. The BUS technique is also used to control and exchange information in different
parts of the excitation system, which makes the system an organic and complete one.
The EXC9000 excitation system has 3 independent channels
(digital/digital/analogue) and 2 different sets of regulation mode. Each regulatory
channel has an independently intelligent fault detection system. The regulator
adopts multi-CPU mode for co-ordination, with the advantage of rationally devided
work, fast computation and low power waste. It can run in an entirely closed
environment, without fans for heat elimination. The adoption of needle-hole linker,
which is made according to the European standard for its structure and size with high
density, ensures the system a strong resistance against striking and vibration.
Averagedly, the regulator can keep working without problems for 17 years. The
human-machine interface takes up the integral flat links, which has a multi-course
3-dimentioned Chinese display. Not only can it be used to show the working status of
the system but also it can be employed as the rugulation tool for intelligent rugulation.
Its various outlet interface plus the simple and practical communication agreement
1-2
makes it accessible to different monitoring systems. In its circuit design and the
technological structure, there are various anti-interruption measures. In this way, the
regulator give full play to the functions of screening, ground connecting, wave sifting
and lines spread design. As a result, besides the low fault rate, the regulater also
passes the national laboratory eletromagnetism compatibility test.
The main characteristics of our rectifier are the high output current, strong wind
stopping fan and intelligenization. More than 400 rectifiers with a rated output current
as large as 2000A are spreading in more than 100 power plants all over China. The
first one was in-services 8 years ago. Associated with the 3-gorges sub-topic of
study on the large-scale excitation rectifier , our institute had also produced the
rectifier with the output current as large as 3000A in the year 2001.
The intelligent rectifier realizes the functions of intelligent working status test, the
intelligent working display, intelligent information transmission, intelligent cubicle
exit, intelligent current balancing and so on. The intelligent proposal provides an all
around monitor for the rectifier, which greatly simplifies the operational circuit. Any
signal for fault error or status signal can be sent out through the BUS. Intelligent
current balancing is a pirate technique of out institute. When adopted, the technique
would ensure a coefficient more than 97% in the parallel rectifiers.
Inside the de-excitation system, the intelligent control system is also adopted. The
conventional gauges and indicator lights are all discarded. The operation, control,
status monitoring, information transmission, information display and tests are all
intelligenized.
Considering the innovation needs and habits of some power plants, we also came
up with the design proposal for the EXC9000 regulator working with the conventional
rectifier and de-excitation system . In this way, the requirements of the power plants
who just reform the regulators are met.
This book “users’ guide” is compiled for the end of an elaboration on the system
including the meathods for type choosing, hard ware strcture and functions,
installation, regulation and maintenance of the equipment as well as ways to handle
errors for the users, so as to better make use of and maintain this system.
1-3
Chapter 1 Brief introduction

This chapter mainly concerns about the main characteristics of the EXC9000
system, and the content of this book
For: those who have no knowledge of this system and get in first touch with it.
Chapter 2 System composition

This chapter contains
(1) Types standard of EXC9000
(2) Rationale diagram of EXC9000
(3) Components and functions of the excitation regulator
(4) Components and functions of the excitation rectifier
(5) Components and functions of the de-excitater and over-voltage protection unit
(6) Components and functions of the fieldflashing unit
(7) External PT, CT measuring units and its functions
(8) Structure design of EXC9000.
For: purchasers, power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, operators
and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations

This chapter contains:
The software function illustration and the logic control diagram for this excitation
system.
For: power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, operators and the
technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 4 Human-machine interface

(1) HMI for regulator
the explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed
attention
(2) HMI for rectifier
1-4
the explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed

attention
(3) HMI for de-excitation
The explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed
attention
For: installers of electrimachine, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 5 Regulation software

(1) Operation of the commissioning software
Including: the installation of regulation software, connection of the communication
interface, start up of the commissioning software and ways to communicate between
the upper and lower machine, as well as the different function units.
(2) Online modification of parameters and matters needed attention
(3) Explanation on meanings of parameter set in the regulator
For: installers of electrimachine, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 6 Installation guide

This chapter includes:
The storage, transportation and installation of the system
For: power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, and the technicians for
maintenance.
Chapter 7 Commissioning
Out-of-factory commissioning scheme for EXC9000 system
Site commissioning scheme for EXC9000 system
For: installers of electrimachine, operators, and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 8 Operation
Operation steps in startup and shutdown as well as generating.
1-5
Measure for emergency.

For: power plant designer, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting

The maitenence scheme for the equipment
Judgement and measures for handling errors and abnormalty
For: operators and technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system

Communication agreement of the system
Connecting mode of the communication interface and the monitoring system
Chapter 11 Electronic braking function

The rationale and wiring mode of the electric braking function
Working procedure of this function
Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control

This chapter contans:
Digital mode of automatic voltage (AVR) and logic control of power system
stability.(PSS)
Controll of limitation, regulation, fault.
1-6
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿System composition
Chapter 2 System composition
1. Models & Specifications ....................................................... 5

2. System Block Diagram ......................................................... 7
3. Regulator………………………………………………….. 8
3.1Regulating channels .................................................................. 8
3.2 Hardware of regulators........................................................... 10
3.2.1 Block diagram of hardware....................................................10
3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)..........................................10
3.2.3 Main CPU Board....................................................................12
3.2.3.1 main functions.................................................................12
3.2.3.2 main components and technique Specifications .............12
3.2.3.3 the definition and function of jumper and linker ............13
3.2.3.4 Precaution........................................................................15
3.2.4 DSP Board..............................................................................15
3.2.4.1 main functions.................................................................16
3.2.4.2. Characteristics and technique indicator .........................16
3.2.4.3 Functional definition of linkers and indicator lights.......17
3.2.5 I/O Board................................................................................19
3.2.5.1 Main functions ................................................................19
3.2.5.2 main characteristics and technical indicators..................20
3.2.5.3 definition of linkers and indicators .................................21
2-1
Users´ guide＿＿＿＿System composition
3.2.6 Analogue quantity board ........................................................24
3.2.6.1 Main functions ................................................................24
3.2.6.2 Manual Channel C ..........................................................24
3.2.6.3 Definition of ports and linkers in the analogue quantity
BUS board...................................................................................28
3.2.7 Switch quantity BUS board ...................................................32
3.2.7.1 Main functions ................................................................32
3.2.7.2 definition for wiring terminal and linkers on the switch
quantity BUS board.....................................................................33
3.2.8 LOU Board.............................................................................41
3.2.8.1 Main functions ................................................................41
3.2.8.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers................42
3.2.9 Intelligent IO board ................................................................44
3.2.9.1 Main functions ................................................................44
3.2.9.2 Definition for wiring terminals and linkers on the IO
board............................................................................................45
3.2.10 The human-machine interface in the regulator ---color liquid
crystal touch screen .........................................................................48
3.2.10.1 main functions...............................................................48
3.2.10.2 operation........................................................................48
3.3 Power supply.......................................................................... 48
4 Rectifier cubicle.................................................................... 49
2-2
4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle.......................................... 49
4.2 The major components of each rectifier cubicle..................... 50
4.3 Intelligent rectifier cubicle ..................................................... 50
4.3.1 intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle ..........................51
4.3.1.1 Main functions ................................................................51
4.3.1.2 definition of wiring terminal and linkers on the rectifier
cubicle .........................................................................................51
4.3.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers of impulse
board................................................................................................57
4.3.3 control of the intelligent rectifier cubicle .............................57
4.4 Pulse formation ...................................................................... 59
4.5 intelligent current balancing................................................... 60
4.6 Pulse transformer.................................................................... 61
4.7 Long-distance transmission of pulse ...................................... 61
4.8 R-C protection ........................................................................ 61
4.9 Conventional rectifier cubicle ................................................ 62
5. De-excitation and overvoltage protection ......................... 63

5.1 Block diagram of de-excitation and overvoltage protection
circuit ........................................................................................... 63
5.2 Allocation of the de-excitation cubicle................................... 65
5.3 Intelligent de-excitation cubicle ............................................. 65
5.3.1 the controlling board for intelligent de-excitation .................65
2-3
5.3.1.1 Definition for the wiring terminal and linkers on this
board............................................................................................66
5.3.2 Intelligent functions ...............................................................70
5.3.3 measurement of the rotor temperature ...................................70
5.3.4 crowbar...................................................................................71
5.3.4.1 the operation principle of crowbar..................................71
5.3.4.2 Definition for wiring terminal and linkers on Crowbar..72
5.3.5 DC transducer board for de-excitater.....................................73
5.3.5.1 Main functions ................................................................73
5.3.5.2 Definition for DC transducer wiring terminal and linkers
.....................................................................................................74
5.5 Conventional de-exciter ......................................................... 75
6. Flashing unit........................................................................ 76
7. External testing units of PT, CT ........................................ 77
8. Design of structure.............................................................. 78
8.1 cubicle structure ..................................................................... 78
8.2 Protection scale ...................................................................... 78
8.3 Surface coating....................................................................... 78
8.4 Doorknobs .............................................................................. 79
8.5 Main circuit ............................................................................ 79
8.6 Conducting wire ..................................................................... 79
8.7 Wire sizes of the conducting wire .......................................... 79
2-4
8.9 Grade of conducting wire ....................................................... 79
1. Models & Specifications

FJL— 5 G A L S P A D E 3 B
⑴⑵ ⑶⑷ ⑸⑹ ⑺⑻ ⑼⑽⑾
[1]: Number of excitation cubicles
[2]: Models of regulators
A——DLT4000
B——DLT6000 (auto/manual channel)
C——DLT6000 (double manual channels)
F——LTW6200
G——EXC9000
[3]: Combinations of regulating channels
O——single channel (with manual operating function)
T——auto/manual double channels
D——two auto channels
A——two auto channels and one manual channel
[4]：Human-machine Interface
L——LCD display
C——industrial controller
I——Intelligent Operation Screen
[5]: Flexible Electric Braking
——No such function
S——self & shunt excitation wiring, needs independent braking transformer
A——External wiring, no special braking transformer
[6]: Rectifier redundancy mode
S—— Single rectifier with no redundancy
R——-Cool standby
P——Parallel working
2-5
[7]: Cooling of rectifier

A——Solid-core aluminium radiator
H——Heat pipe radiator
W——Water cooling
[8]: De-excitation mode
A——AC de-excitation
D——DC de-excitation
R——Redundancy de-excitation
[9]: Models of rectifier cubicle
Code Rates Output excitation Force output No. of commuters
Current excitation
Current
A 600A 1200A Full-controlled
single bridge
B 1200A 2400A full-controlled，double bridges
C 800A 1600A full-controlled，single bridge
D 1000A 2000A full-controlled，single bridge
E 2000A 4000A full-controlled，single bridge
F 4000A
X
[10]: No. of rectifier cubicles
[11]: Modes of de-excitation resistor
A——linear resistor
B——non-linear resistor
X——Other modes
Generally speaking, static self & shunt excitation system equipped with large and
medium sized generator is composed as shown in the following box.
Name No. Size (W×D×H)(mm³) Basic Description
2-6
Regulator 1 Unit 800×1000×2260 or 3-channel,2-BUS, intelligent

800×800×2260 detecting 、 intelligent
interface 、 color LCD
touching screen。
Rectifier 2~4 800×800×2260 1000A Intelligent local

cubicle Units 800×1000×2260 2000A BUS
1000×1200×2260 4000A
Field circuit 1 Unit 800×1000×2260 Field circuit breaker,

breaker De-excitation control
cubicle circuit 、 excitation starting
unit, outlet BUS bar
Non-linear 1 Unit 800×1000×2260 High-capacity non-linear

cubicle resistors, crystal tube
flyover
Excitation 1 Set 3-phase epoxy dry

Transformer transformer or transforming
set
2. System Block Diagram

As is shown in the diagram, EXC9000 system is composed of regulator,
Human-machine interface, external interface, rectifier cubicle, de-excitation and
over-voltage protection and excitation transformer etc.
2-7
T02 U BATT. U AUX.

Q02
Q90
F05 AC AUX. BUS
EXCITATION AC BUS
Q80
TRANSFORMER T05 DC BUS
SA01
VI01
DC24V BUS
SA02
VI02 R03
A/D D/A
G34
V03
Channel A G33
G32
DSP CPU I/O 接口板 G31 900P
900A Q03
LCD F02
开关量总线板
模拟量总线板
Channel B
900K
M 900N
DSP CPU I/O 接口板

900A 900M
900E
900H
QFG
R02
Channel C
900C
PULSE BUS
LCD 900K
LCD 人机接口 CANBUS
900J
串行通讯 900I 900G 输出信号

IPC
GS
The whole set of data exchange in the excitation system realized through the local
CAN BUS, following are the station numbers of CAN BUS:
Hardware Channel Channel L.O.U. Industrial Intelligent 1# 2# 3# 4# De-exciter
A B Controller I/O Rectifier rectifier rectifier rectifier
cubicle cubicle cubicle cubicle
No. of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
station
Code CHA CHB LOU IPC IIU REC1 REC2 REC3 REC4 FCB
Name
3. Regulator
3.1Regulating channels
The EXC9000 excitation regulator is a 3-channel regulator, The A/B channel is
microcomputer channel, its core controlling part is the 32-digit BUS controller, and
Channel C as the analogue channel. Channel A is the main channel; measuring signals
are obtained through the 1st set of voltage (PT1) and current mutual inducers (CT1)
2-8
BV1 &BA1 at the generator terminals. Channel B is the 1st standby channel;
measuring signals are obtained through the 2st set of voltage (PT2) and current mutual
inducers (CT2) BV2 &BA2. The synchronous voltage signal collected from the
secondary side of the excitation transformer is for use of the 3 channels. So it is with
the excitation current from the current transformer on the secondary side of the
excitation transformer.
Microcomputer/microcomputer/analogue 3-channel and 2-mode redundant
structure is used which is composed of two automatic voltage-regulating channels (A
& B) and one manual-regulating channel (C). The three channels are entirely
independent each other from measuring circuit to pulse output circuit. The
regulating channels work under the principle of main-auxiliary mode. The normal
mode is that Channel A is the operating channel, Channel B is the standby channel,
with channel B and C automatically tracking channel A. Both channel B and
Channel C can be chosen to be the standby channel, with channel B being the first
choice. In case there’s anything wrong with channel A, it is automatically
switched to the standby channels. Channel C is all the time automatically
following the operating channel. It is the same with channel B when it has
something wrong, channel C would be automatically switched to for operation.
The relation of the three channels is as the following:
A套调节器
测量元件 B套调节器操作元件
C套调节器
A—BUS K—BUS
电源系统
Collocation of Regulating Channels
2-9
3.2 Hardware of regulators

3.2.1 Block diagram of hardware
As is shown in the following diagram, the regulator is composed of regulating
channels A, B and C, analogue quantity BUS board, switch quantity BUS board,
Human-machine interface, interface circuit etc. The hardware are:
The A, B automatic channels with each containing:
One CPU board
One DSP measuring board
One I/O board
One digital quantity BUS interface board
One analogue quantity BUS interface board(C Channel included)
One L.O.U. board
One set of Human-machine interface
One intelligent I/O board and corresponding relay output board
模拟量总线开关量总线人机接口

LCD
900E 900H 900J
CAN BUS
接口板接口板
900A 智能I/O
900A
900I
工控机
C通道
900C A通道 B通道
I/O I/O
DSP CPU D/A DSP CPU D/A
5468 5094 CAN 5468 5094 CAN
5432 5432
继电器
900G
COMPACT PCI COMPACT PCI
Diagram Hardware of the regulator
3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)

A/B Channel is a microcomputer excitation regulator, adapting multi-CPU
hardware mode, in which several CPU work together with different divisions of work.
Mainly the Intel series CPU multi-CPU mode is in use. It is fit to be the core
2-10
processor with its high processing capacity, more external interface resources, ample
surrounding supporting software and hardware and simple programming. Taking
advantages of this mode, we make it as the core processor, to finish the regulatory
control.
DSP chip has huge timing capacity to process large quantity of data, which is quite
fit, for sampling and processing of data. It is mainly used to realize synchronized
collection and high-speed switching of input of 34-line analogue quantity and output
of 16-bit digital quantity.
Independent error testing is available by SCM set in each of the channel, so as to
avoid the problem of inability to self-test when there’s something wrong with the
automatic channel. In this way, the security level is raised.
Automatic channel hardware block diagram is as follows.
模拟量总线开关量总线
900E 900H
接口板
900A
I/O
DSP CPU D/A
5468 5094 CAN
5432
COMPACT PCI
Automatic Channel Hardware Block Diagram

Core parts in automatic channel are internal BUS industrial controller, in which
three panels are inserted:
CPU board, a highly integrated single-panel computer that, with all functions
of an industrial computer and core part as 486DX5-133, is fit for embedding
use.
DSP board , realizing synchronized collection and high-speed switching of
input of 34-line analogue quantity and output of 16-bit digital quantity. This
2-11
panel, with DSP chip as the intelligent component, can realize the in -phase
AC sampling technique per cycle in 32-point vector and the method of phase
shift. The main CPU can read at any time collection or calculation results
through 16-digit double-interface RAM chip.
I/O board, a multi-functional I/O panel that provides output of 4-line
analogue quantity, input of 32-line switch quantity (including 24-line optical
separation input+8-line TTL electric level input), output channel of 24-line
switch quantity (including 8-line optical separation output + 16-line TTL
electric level output) and CANBUS interface.
3.2.3 Main CPU Board

The main CPU Board is a single-panel computer of high compact, with all
functions of other ordinary computers, suitable for embedded use.
3.2.3.1 main functions

(1) Regulatory function: preset the quota, AVR Regulator (PID+PSS),
FCR Regulator, deviation, constant reactive regulation /power factor regulation, soft
excitation starting, channel tracking, system voltage tracking, ect.
(2) Limitation function: V/F limitation, force excitation limitation, over excitation
limitation, under excitation limitation, stator current limitation, ect.
(3) Other functions: online data modification, record wave of errors, and error
prevention in operation.
3.2.3.2 main components and technique Specifications

486DX5-133 CPU
APCI BUS interface
DOS interface
FLASH E-disk
4KB EEPROM
A RS232 serial and a RS232/422/485 serial
RJ –45 Ethernet interface
2-12
PC104 linker
Watchdog timer, which can restore the system
Source voltage +5V(5.0V-5.25V) , source power consumption +5V@4A
3.2.3.3 the definition and function of jumper and linker

(1) Serial port
CPU provides for 4 serial communication interfaces, 2 of which, namely, COM1
(CN22) & COM2 (CN23), are D89-cable sockets, introduced through the board.
COM1 is used to connect the computer, while COM 2 is not used in the regulation.
Following is the pin definition of COM1 .
COM1 (CN22)
PIN SIGNAL PIN SIGNAL
1 DCD1 6 DSR1
2 RXD1 7 RTS1
3 TXD1 8 CTS1
4 DTR1 9 RI1
5 CND1
(2) Jumper and linker
Jumper Functions
JP1 Com4 Activating jumper
JP2 Com3 Activating jumper
JP5 LCD SHF/ASHF Timer choose
JP8 LCD Voltage choose
JP3, JP4 COM3 Setup for mode choose
JP6, JP7 COM4 Setup for mode choose
JP9 EEPROM Write-protect jumper
JP10, JP11 E-disk setup
JP13 E-disk chip (FLASH OR EPROM) jumper
JP12 CPLD Programming linker, users impassable
JP14 CMOS clear jumper
2-13
Liner Functions
CN1 Power supply linker
CN2 Frontpage board linker
CN3 Ethernet Linker
CN4 VGA and printer linker
CN5 Io interface for users, linking COM3, 4,LCD, VGA, ect.
CN6 LCD Linker (Plain cable)
CFD1 CF slot
CN7 Hard disk linker
CN8 AT96 BUS interface
CN9 PC104 linker
SW1 Restoring switch
CN11 Digital I/O linker
CN10 Infrared linker
CN12 Soft-disk driver linker
CN14 PS/2 keyboard and mouse linker PS2
CN13 Power LED & keyboard lock
CN15 COM1, 2 linker (D headed)
CN16 USB linker
U49&U45 E-disk PLCC socket able to support 32 footed flash or EPROM chip in
which U71 being the first one, the socket for system disk.
(3) Setup for out-of-factory
Jumper Setup For output Explanation
JP1 1-2 Shot linkage Active COM4
JP2 1-2 Shot linkage Active COM3
JP3 1-2 Shot linkage
Set COM3 as RS-232
JP4 1-3,7-9,2-4,8-10,Shotlinkage
JP5 1-2 Shot linkage LCD TIMER CONTROL
2-14
JP6 1-2 Shot linkage

SET COM4 AS RS-232
JP7 1-3,7-9,2-4,8-10Shotlinkage
JP8 2-3 Shot linkage LCD DRIVING
VOLTAGE 3.3V
JP9 1-2 Shot linkage EPROM
WRITE-PROTECT
(NORMAL)
JP10 2-3 Shot linkage Am 486DX5-133
JP11 No shot linkage Active E-disk
JP13 1-2,3-4 shot linkage 1MB FLASH
JP14 1-2 shot linkage No deletion of CMOS
setup
(4) Application procedure
The application procedure in main CPU board is written into the flash chip labeled
“flash1” and “flash2” by the programming machine, “flash 1” chip inserted into Slot
U49 and “flash2” chip into Slot U52.
(5) Indicator light and restoration button
On the front of CPU board there’s a 5V-power indicator light and a restoring button.
The restoring button can restore the main CPU Board and its system.
3.2.3.4 Precaution
ATTENTION: before contacting the CPU board, one should touch the ground so
as to eliminate static. Electronic apparatus are sensitive to static. Use a static ring
all the time and put the board in the static-shield bag when it is not used.
3.2.4 DSP Board

This is a special intelligent DSP A/D data collection board, realizing 34-line input
data and high-speed switch with 16-figure output. This board adopts the DSP chip
as the core component, realizing a 32-piont vector simultaneous AC sample taking
and handling with the arithmatics of window shift. Main CPU can read the data
collected by DSP board through a RAM chip. By making use of the digital and
2-15
mimic short linkage, the board is able to get the most accurate result possible.
The 32 point vector simultaneous AC sampling and processing by the arithmetic of
window mobile , which is developed by our company, overcome the problems of long
period of time for sampling ， phenomenally reducing the time for regulator
measurement, increasing the ability of rapid regulation.

(1) Data collecting
Generator terminal PT, generator terminal CT, system PT, excitation transformer
secondary volts CT, PSS testing signal (V1-V4)
(2) Data computation
Generator voltage, generator current, system voltage, excitation current, voltage
frequency, power, reactive power;
(3) Data transmit
Store the above data into RAM, for the CPU to deploy
3.2.4.2. Characteristics and technique indicator

DSP processor: TMS320VC33-120
Program storage inside the board : 128K×8bit EPROM
Main CPU and DSP can require quit to each other with flexible and
convenient handshake signals
With the watchdog function, refresh time 150 ms , 600 ms, 1200 ms , selected
through the jumper
Within the board there’s steady voltage equipment , the users prepare a +5V
and ±12V power supply.
A/D transmitter: resolution :16 bit
Output code: binary system
Time for transmission in single channel : 15μs
No. of channels: single port 34 line
Mimic signal input : ±5V
Π-filtering electrical circuit on board
2-16
Single channel gathering frequency: 500KHz

Multi-channel simultaneous collection frequency:
330K/amount of channels (12figured accuracy, setup time 3Us)
200K/amount of channels (16figured accuracy, setup time 5 Us)
Total error : ±0.005%FSR
Power consumption: 340m A @+5V
140m A @+12V ;140m A @-12V
3.2.4.3 Functional definition of linkers and indicator lights

(1) Linkers on DSP board (out of factory setup)
Jumper Output setup Explanation
W1 2-3 Shot linkage No written in (EPRO M)
W2 1-2 Shot linkage Serial EEPROM is normal mode
W3 2-3 Shot linkage The H3 signal automatically clear
watchdog’s overflow in DSP
W4 Open Time for watchdog overflow 600ms
W7 3-4, 7-8, 11-12, SHORT LINKAGE The I/O base address is 150H in
output
W8 1-2 SHORT LINKAGE Setup as HALT 10
W9 1-2, 5-6, 7-8, 11-12SHORT The RAM address setup as
LINKAGE D2000-D2FFFH
(2) Definition for 20 cored plain cable linked to analogue quantity bus board
EXC900E3
Cable NO. Code name Channel NO. RAM Definition
address
1 UA1 CH0 0000 Pot A with PT
voltage
2 UB2 CH1 0002 Pot B with PT
voltage
3 UC1 CH2 0004 Pot C with PT
2-17
voltage
4 IA CH3 0006 Current from
power generator A
5 IB CH4 0008 Current from
power generator B
6 IC CH5 000A Current from
power generator C
7 US CH6 000C System PT
voltage
8 IL CH7 000E Excitation
electronic current
9 V1 CH8 0010 Standby A/D
12 V4 CH11 0016 In-phase voltage
13 UKA CH12 0018 Control signal
UKA
14 UKB CH13 001A Control signal
UKB
15 UKC CH14 001C Control signal
UKC
16 UAB CH15 001E Port voltage
frequency
17 GND Power and signal
spot
18 -12V -12V Power
19 +12V +12V Power
20 +12V +12V Power
(3) Application programs
2-18
Programs of DSP are written into Chip EPROM, and the Chip EPROM can be
inserted to the first socket U3 on the top left of DSP board.
(4) Definition of the indicator lights on DSP board
Director light NO. Function
L1 ON if connected to power
L2 ON if the frequency is below 35HZ
L3 ON if the frequency is above 35HZ
L4 twist
L5 ON if sample and compute
3.2.5 I/O Board

This is a multi-functional I/O board in accordance with the AT96 BUS regulation. It
supplies 4-line mimic output, 32-line switch quantity input (including 24-line input
and 8-lline TTL input), 24-line switch quantity output (including 8-line output
+16-line TTL output) channel and CAN BUS communicative interface.
3.2.5.1 Main functions

(1) Receive the control direction to the regulator
Increase or decrease of excitation, field flashing, inversion, interconnection, PSS
on etc..
(2) Realize the communication between the regulator and Local CANBUS
Connect the regulator and CAN BUS, realizing the data exchange between
regulator and LOU, intelligent IO as well as the interface of human-machine.
(3) The output signal for error in the regulator
PT error, synchronic error, watchdog signals, ect.
(4) The output signal of the digital impulse
Export digital impulsion signals to digital quantity BUS, producing 6 phase
impulsive signal.
2-19
3.2.5.2 main characteristics and technical indicators

32-line switch quantity input (including 24-line input and 8-line TTL input),
24-line switch quantity output (including 8-line output +16-line TTL output)
channel
CAN BUS communicative interface
Analogue quantity output
Channels: 4 lines
Resolution factor: 12- figured
Automatic Clear up once connected with power, reservation for data in
warm start
Output: 0-10v
Established time: 30u S
Exchange accuracy: 0.3%FSR
Driving ability for output voltage: +5m A
digital quantity output
Light isolation output channels: 8 lines
TTL output channels: 16 lines
Light isolation output low electrical level :VOL =0~0.4 V
Light isolation output high electrical level: VOH =24V
Isolated voltage: 2500VDC
Frequency for output signals: 20KHZ Square wave being
the highest ( 50% vacant)
Light isolation Input loaded electric current: Single line being the
highest 80m A
Switch quantity input
Light isolation input channels : 24 lines
TTL input channels: 8 lines
Light isolation input low electrical level :VOL =0~0.4 V
Light isolation input high electrical level: VOH =24V
2-20
Input electric resistance: 4.7KΩ

Isolated voltage: 2500VDC
Frequency for input signals: 20KHZ Square wave being the highest
(50% vacant)
3.2.5.3 definition of linkers and indicators

(1) Linker on I/O board
JUMPER OUTPUT SETUP EXPLANATION
W1 1-2 break No connection with the CAN
terminal resistance
W2 1-3short linkage, or all break No usage of the breaking function
W3 1-2,7-8,9-10,11-12 short Set the base address as 180H
linkage
(2) Definition of the 40-core plain cable linking the I/O board and digital quantity
EXC900H3
2-21
Functions Definition Line Definition Functions

Increase excitation R607 1 2 R611 Decrease
(R613) (R617) excitation
SFC start BIN1 3 4 BIN2 Oscilloscope
trigger
PSS on R692 5 6 R652 Interconnection
Electric braking N01 7 8 N02 Back to back
excitation on generator
Start command R651 9 10 R653 Stop command
Back to back motor N03 11 12 Test A/B Program change
Channel address GND 13 14 COMA Channel A
Operation
channel B operation COMB 15 16 COMC Channel C
Operation
Changeover to auto N04 17 18 Y47 Rise from zero
Channel tracing on R695 19 20 R696 System tracing on
Commissioning SW0 21 22 SW1 Commissioning
Testing MANA 23 24 R671 Impulse error
PT error PTB 25 26 R631 10% Ug
40% Ug R632 27 28 WDOG Error testing
Synchronic error R28 29 30
and magnetism loss
CAN BUS + CAN+ 31 32 CAN- CAN BUS -
D/A channel 0 DA0 33 34 DA1 D/A channel 1
D/A channel 2 DA2 35 36 DA3 D/A channel 3
DC24V+ R601 37 38 R601 DC24V+
DC24V- R602 39 40 R602 DC24V-
2-22
(3) Definition of the 20-CORE plain cable linking the I/O board and digital
quantity EXC900H3
Functions Definition Line Definition Functions
182.3 1 2 182.0 Lock
Signal D0 D0 3 4 DIN25
Signal D1 D1 5 6 182.1 Break
Signal D2 D2 7 8 182.2
Signal D3 D3 9 10 GND
DIN 29 19 20 GND
(4) Definition of the INPUT/OUTPUT indicator lights on the I/O board
Functions Code DI NO. Code Functions
23 24 R671 Impulse error
21 22
Channel tracing R695 19 20 R696 System tracing on
on
N04 17 18 Increase voltage from
zero
Operation set B R662 15 16 R664 Operation set C
Channel address ADDS 13 14 R660 Operation set A
N03 11 12 Test
Electrical barking N01 7 8 N02
on
PSS on R692 5 6 R652 line breaker close
2-23
BIN1 3 4 BIN2
Increase R607 1 2 R611 Decrease excitation
excitation
Function Code DO NO. Code Function

Program 1 2 Synchronic error
modification
Over excitation 3 4 Twinkling in
operation
PT error PTB 5 6 R631 10%U g
40% Ug R632 7 8 WDOG Error detect
3.2.6 Analogue quantity board

(1) Realize the electricity isolation through such AD sampling as the terminal PT,
CT and system PT, and the excitation transformer secondary CT.
(2) Regulate the signal analogue quantity
(3) Connect with the DSP board, transfer the above electricity to the DSP board
(4) Testing and regulating signals for over excitation (output through transistors)
(3) 10%Ug voltage signal testing (output through transistors)
(4) The regulation of channel C and impulse output
(5) AVR, PSS section testing and interface for testing signal input
(6) Connection with the digital quantity BUS board.
3.2.6.2 Manual Channel C

Channel C is an analogue regulator located on integrates circuit. With excitation
current as feedback quantity, the setting is achieved through control by a SCM of a
serial D/A converter of 12-digit accuracy. Linear integrated PID regulating circuit is
used for regulation. Output control signals are sent to triggering board for phase shift
triggering. SCM for realization of setting has its own EPROM, rich I/O resources and
2-24
real-time interruption functions to ensure the most concise hardware without other
necessary peripheral parts.
Excitation regulation of Channel C, entirely different from that of microcomputer
regulator in realizing principle and approach, can therefore have good standby
function. Its functions are comparatively simple. Apart from regulation based on
excitation current, other functions are automatic presetting, channel tracking, terminal
voltage limitation and low-frequency inverting etc.
(1) The main functions of Channel C
Constant excitation current regulation
Control of Constant control angle
voltage control
Quantity setting and automatic presetting
Automatic tracking operation channel
Low-frequency inversion
Phase shift triggering and impulse control
Watchdog signal output for error testing
Lowest excitation current limitation
(2) Quantity Setting
The increasing or decreasing switch excitation signals change the data inside the
register, which is converted through the serial digital D/A converter of 12-bit accuracy.
The output is the quantity setting of excitation current for this channel.
The quantity setting has the functions of automatic presetting and automatic
tracking. Without the startup dictation, it is set as the lowest limit. When there is a
dictation for startup, it will automatically track along the current operating channel, so
that the signals are basically compatible with the channel. The accuracy of tracking
is regulated by W3 potentiometer. When Channel C is operated, the automatic
tracking is invalidation.
The quantity setting in Channel C has the function of setting the lowest limit once it
is interconnected with a particular set of computers, so as to prevent the accidental
loss of excitation by miscarriage. When the set of computers are not working and
2-25
the low frequency inversion starts, it automatically would move back to the lowest
limit set by the excitation current.
(3) Phase shift triggering board
Phase shift triggering board receive phase shift control signal, synchronization
signal, and other assistant control signals, to realize the function of impulse output.
It is an independent integrated unit, which is set on the impulse trigger board,
connected with it through the 20-feeted plugs. The size of the phase shift
triggering board is 118mm×70mm×20mm.
The model number is MU004, it is a 6-phase trigger controlled by the analogue
quantity, suitable for stream and inversion control of the crystal break tube of
3-phase full bridge (or half bridge). Different from the ordinary triggers, phase
shift-triggering board is the combination of IC digit and IC analogue electric circuit,
giving full play the respective advantages of the 2 circuits. It has simple
components, no debugging trouble, multi functions and high reliability.
Main characteristics:
a. Output of 6-phase impulse
b. With the lowest and high limit for the control angle inside
c. Normal work under circumstance of synchronization signal frequency
changing.
d. With the functions of testing in interruption and inversion.
e. With “permit/prohibit” port for inversion in the setting
f. With “permit/prohibit” port for impulse output on the setting
g. Automatic regulation for the symmetry in the 6-phase impulse location.
When the control signal waves are huge, the imbalance of the phase
location is within the range of ±2 degrees.
h. With high resistance against interruption
Definition for the introducing foot
A 20-line plain line socket, the definition as following, introduces the outlet
socket of the phase shift triggering board:
2-26
Functions Signal Direction Code Introducing Code Direc Signal Functions

type No. foot No. tion type
A-phase AC24V Input UA 1 2 UB Input AC B-phase
in-phase 24V in-phase
signal signal
C-phase AC24V Input UC 3 4 GND Input Signal spot
in-phase
signal
Inversion TTL Input K1 5 6 UK Input 0~6 Phase
prohibit low-freq VDC shift control
uency signal
validity
5V Power DC5V +5V 7 8 +12V DC 12V
12V power
Break of TTL Output PTB 9 10 GND Power spot
phase or low-freq
inversion uency
validity
-A-phase TTL Output M-A 11 12 M-B Outp TTL -B
impulse high-fre ut high-fre -Phase
quency quency impulse
validity validity
-C-phase TTL Output M-C 13 14 M+A Outp TTL +A
impulse high-fre ut high-fre -Phase
validity validity
+B-phase TTL Output M+B 15 16 M+C Outp TTL +C
impulse high-fre ut high-fre -phase
2-27
validity validity
In-phase TTL Output CF 17 18 DP Outp TTL Low
impulse low-freq ut low-freq frequency
uency uency inversion
validity validity
NC 19 20 OP Input TTL Impulse
low-freq output permit
uency
validity
3.2.6.3 Definition of ports and linkers in the analogue quantity
BUS board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers
Name Foot quantity Functions
JA 20PIN Linked with J6 DSP board in channel A
JB 20PIN Linked with J6 DSP board in channel B
JC 34PIN Linked with switch quantity board JC1
I1 10PIN Linked with the port
I2 10PIN Linked with the port
X1~X9 3PIN Linked with the port on CT and CT
current
W2 Regulation of voltage limitation in
Channel C
W3 Regulation of tracking in Channel C
W4 Presetting for over excitation protection
JP1 Short-circuit this jumper, channel C is
operated in constant control angle;
when it is on break, channel C is in the
2-28
mode of constant excitation current

regulation
LDI increase director light for channel C
LDD decrease director light for channel C
LDX Limitation of increase/ decrease
director light for channel C
(2) Definition for JA/JB socket
Functions Definition Line NO. Definition Functions
A-phase port UA1 1 2 UB1 B-phase port PT voltage
PT voltage
C-phase port UC1 3 4 IA A-phase power generator
PT voltage current
B-phase IB 5 6 IC C-phase power generator
power current
generator
current
System PT US 7 8 IL Excitation current
voltage
Stand-by A/D V1 9 10 V2 Stand-by A/D
Stand-by A/D V3 11 12 V4 In-phase voltage
Set A control UKA 13 14 UKB Set B control signal
signal
Set C control UKC 15 16 UAB Measurement of voltage
signal frequency for ports
Power and AGND 17 18 -12 -12V power
signal spot
+12V power +12 19 20 +12 +12V power
(3) Definition for J/C Socket
2-29
Functions Definition Line. Definition Functions

No.
In-phase signals A3 1 2 B3 In-phase signal
In-phase signals C3 3 4 UG2 Port voltage
Increased excitation R618 5 6 R620 Reduced excitation
channel tracking on R695 7 8 IL Excitation current signal
Start command R651 9 10 R652 On grid signal
-A impulse -A 11 12 +A +A impulse
-B impulse -B 13 14 +B +B impulse
-C impulse -C 15 16 +C +C impulse
Testing signals 052 17 18 UKW Set C control signal
Over-excitation protection R639 19 20 COMC Set C Operation
signals
Ug>10% R631 21 22 R653 Inversion de-excitation
Set A control signal UKA 23 24 UKB Set B control signal
Set A in-phase voltage V4 25 26 (V4) Set B in-phase voltage
27 28
29 30
DC24V+ R601 31 32 R601 DC24V+
DC24V- R602 33 34 R602 DC24V-
(4) Definition for wiring terminal I1
Terminal Code Functions Remarks
No. No.
1 +12 Set A +12V power
2 -12 Set A –12 power
3 GND Set A ground
4 V1 Analogue quantity input 1 Extended usage such as testing
5 V2 Analogue quantity input 2 No wiring in the EXC 9000
6 V3 Analogue quantity input 3 normal excitation
2-30
7 GND Power ground

8 (+12) Set B +12V power
9 (-12) Set B –12V power
10 GND Set B ground
(5) Definition for wiring terminal I2
Terminal No. Code Functions Remarks
No.
1 A611 1PT A- phase voltage
2 B611 1PT B- phase voltage
3 C611 1PT C- phase voltage
4 N600 PT neutral point
(6) Definition for wiring terminal X1~X9
Terminal No. Code No. Functions Remarks
X1-1 A461 1CT A-phase current Input
X1-2 N461 Output
X1-3
X2-1 B461 1CT B-phase current Input
X2-2 N461 Output
X2-3
X3-1 C461 1CT C-phase current Input
X3-2 N461 Output
X3-3
2-31
X4-2 N462 Output

X4-3
X5-2 N462 Output
X5-3
X6-2 N462 Output
X6-3
X7-2 N463 Output
X7-3
X8-2 N463 Output
X8-3
X9-2 N463 Output
X9-3
3.2.7 digital quantity BUS board

(1) Realizing transfer of different digital quantity signals
(2) Realizing control of impulse, such as residual voltage flashing, pulse cut,
on/off of the rectifier pulse, ect.
(3) Intelligent current balancing setting, which is used to regulate the
close-ring current balancing in the rectifier cubicles
(4) Analogue quantity output transfer, used for testing
(5) DC24V Power testing
(6) Channel changeover
(7) Increase/decrease excitation
(8) Output of in-phase signal and impulse
2-32
3.2.7.2 definition for wiring terminal and linkers on the switch
quantity BUS board

(1) Definition of jumpers, potential device and linkers
Name Introducing Functions
foot
X1 16PIN Wiring terminal
CN1 6PIN Wiring terminal, CAN BUS Communicative
terminal
JA1 40PIN Linked with set A machine basket J8
JB1 40PIN Linked with set B machine basket J8
JC1 34PIN Linked with analogue quantity board JC
JA2 20PIN Linked with set A machine basket J7
JB2 20PIN Linked with set B machine basket J7
J1 34PIN Linked with SCM J5
J2 26PIN Linked with rectifier impulse board J1
W1 Regulation potential device of intelligent current
balancing
JP1 2PIN Exit for in-phase error and excitation loss
JP2 2PIN Residual voltage flashing valid
JP3 2PIN Short circuit, channel C valid
(2) Definition of wiring terminal X1
Terminal Code No. Functions Remarks
No.
1 R687 Electric braking start Input signal
2-33
2 R686 Remote excitation Input signal

3 R688 Back to back generation on Input signal
4 R684 Remote added excitation Input signal
5 R689 Switch for de-excitation Input signal
6 R621 Switched to Set A operation Input signal
7 R690 Back to back braking Input signal
8 R623 Switched to stand-by channels Input signal
9 R691 Lock PSS Input signal
10 R622 Switched to set B operation Input signal
11 R679 Electric braking fail Input signal
12 R683 Stop dictation Input signal
13 R681 Start dictation Input signal
14 R682 Signals for interconnection (on Input signal
grid)
15 R680 95% speed signals Input signal
16 R685 Remote deduced excitation Input signal
No.
1 +24I Line I DC24V power+ Input signal
2 +24II Line II DC24V power+ Input signal
3 GND DC24V- (public terminal) Input signal
4 GND DC24V- (public terminal)
5 R697 Automatic switch Input signal
6 R651 Automatic switch Output signal
7 R698 SFC start Input signal
8 R631 >10%Ug Output signal
9 R639 Protection of over excitation Output signal
10 QFG~ Impulse cut off when circuit Input signal
2-34
switch open
11
12 R658 BOD action signal Input signal
13 Man B Set B short circuit testing switch Input signal
(reverse)
14 Man A Set A short circuit testing switch Input signal
(reverse)
15 Test B Input signal
(reverse)
16 Test A Input signal
(reverse)
No.
1 A1 Synchronization voltage Input
2 B1 Synchronization voltage Input
3 C1 Synchronization voltage Input
4 GND Analogue spot Input
8 B3 Synchronization voltage Input
9 C3 Synchronization voltage Input
No.
1 +5 SET A +5V power Input
2 +5 Set A +5V power Input
2-35
3 ND Set A power sport Input

4 GND Set A power sport Input
7 -12 Set A -12V power Input
8 -12 Set A -12V power Input
9 (+5) Set B +5V power Input
11 GND Set B power sport Input
12 GND Set B power sport Input
15 (-12) Set B -12V power Input
16 (-12) Set B -12V power Input
No.
1 (DA0) Set B D/A output CH0 Output
4 GND Analogue spot Output
5 DA0 Set A D/A output CH0 Output
8 SW0 Debugged by the manufactory Input signal
9 SW1 Debugged by the manufactory Input signal
10 COMC Set C operation Output signal
11 COMB Set B operation Output signal
12 COMA Set A operation Output signal
2-36
13 S.B Set B standby Output signal

14 S.C Set C standby Output signal
15 UG2 Terminal voltage signals Output signal
16 R624 Switch to C operation/standby Input signal
(6) Definition of wiring terminal CN1
No.
1 CAN+ Communication with CAN BUS
2 CAN+ Communication with CAN BUS
3 CAN- Communication with CAN BUS
4 CAN- Communication with CAN BUS
5 GND2 Communication with CAN BUS Linked with
screening spot
6 GND2 Communication with CAN BUS
(7) Definition of sockets JA1/JB1
Functions Definition Line No. Definition Functions
Added excitation R607(R613) 1 2 R611(R617) Deduced
excitation
SFC start BINI 3 4 BIN2
PSS on R692 5 6 R652 Interconnection
Electric braking N01 7 8 N02 Back to back
excitation generating
Back to back rotor N03 11 12 TESTA/B
start
Channel address GND 13 14 COMA Set A operation
Set B operation COMB 15 16 COMC Set C operation
Automatic switch N04 17 18 Y47 0
Channel tracking R695 19 20 R696 System tracking
2-37
input input
Debugging SW0 21 22 SW1 Debugging
Testing MANA/B 23 24 R671 Impulse error
PT error PTB 25 26 R631 10% Ug
40%Ug R632 27 28 WDOG Error examination
In-phase error or R28 29 30
excitation loss
CAN BUS + CAN+ 31 32 CAN- CAN BUS -
D/A channel 0 DA0 33 34 DA1 D/A CHANNEL 1
D/A channel 2 DA2 35 36 DA3 D/A CHANNEL 3
DC24V + R601 37 38 R601 DC24V+
DC24V- R602 39 40 R602 DC24V-
(8) Definition of socket JC
Function Definition Line No. Definition Function
In-phase signal A3 1 2 B3 Synchronization signal
In-phase signal C3 3 4 UG2 Generator voltage
Added excitation R618 5 6 R620 Decrease excitation
Channel tracking R695 7 8 IL Excitation current
Start dictation R651 9 10 R652 Interconnection
signals
-A impulse -A 11 12 +A +A impulse
-B impulse -B 13 14 +B +B impulse
-C impulse -C 15 16 +C +C impulse
SCM signals 052 17 18 UKW Set C tracking signals
Protection for R639 19 20 COMC Set C operation
over-excitation
10%Ug R631 21 22 R653 Inversion
Set A control signals UKA 23 24 UKB Set B control signal
Set A in-phase voltage V4 25 26 (V4) Set B in-phase voltage
2-38
27 28
29 30
DC24V+ R601 31 32 R601 DC24V+
DC24V- R602 33 34 R602 DC24V-
(9) Definition of sockets JA2/JB2
182.3 1 2 182.0 Lock & Store
Signal D0 D0 3 4 DIN25
Signal D1 D1 5 6 182.1 Break
Signal D2 D2 7 8 182.2
DIN29 19 20 GND
(10) Definition of socket J1
De-excitation switch X40 1 2 X41 Lock PSS
close
Electric braking X42 3 4 N01 Set excitation with
failure electric braking
Back to back X44(N02) 5 6 N03 Back to back
generation electric motion
Set A regulator error X46(R672) 7 8 X47(R672) Set B regulator
error
Sat A Power error X48(R674) 9 10 X49(R674) Sat B Power error
>10%Ug X4A(R631) 11 12 X4B(R650) Manual excitation
13 14 X4D(R652) Interconnection
2-39
signals
Stop dictation X4E(R654) 15 16 X4F(R639) Protection for
over-excitation
Channel tracking Y40(R695) 17 18 Y41(R696) Set systematic
voltage tracking
Set Recorded wave Y4A(BIN2) 19 20 Y43 Added excitation
trigger
Deduced excitation Y44 21 22 Y45(R651) Automatic
excitation
Set Residual voltage Y46 23 24 Y47 0
excitation
Set PSS Y48(R692) 25 26 Y49 Switched to Set A
operation and Set
B stand-by
DC 24V I normal X56 27 28 X57 DC24V II normal
Set A MCU testing X50(B051) 29 30 X51(B051) Set B MCU testing
Set C MCU testing X52(B052) 31 32 X55 Set A operation
Set B operation X54(COMB) 33 34 Set C operation/
stand-by
(11) Definition of socket J2
Signal Definition Code Line No. Code Definition Signal
No. No.
Out Impulse +24V 1 2 -A -A-phase Out
power impulse
Out Impulse +24V 3 4 +A +A-phase Out
power impulse
Out Impulse +24V 5 6 -B -B-phase Out
power impulse
Out Impulse +24V 7 8 +B +B-phase Out
2-40
power impulse
Out Impulse +24V 9 10 -C -C-phase Out
power impulse
Out Impulse +24V 11 12 +C +C-phase Out
power impulse
Out Switch of CONA 13 14
de-excitation CONB 15 16
and impulse CONC 17 18
COND 19 20
NC Residual R308 21 22 EQ_L Intelligent Out
voltage equal
excitation electric
flow
current
Out Power +24V +24V 23 24 +24V Power Out
+24V
In Power 0V CND 25 26 CND Power 0 V In
3.2.8 LOU Board

LOU board is the core operational part of the EXC9000 excitation system,
controlling the state information and operational dictations from the CAN BUS. It
operates on the systematic parts through the CAN BUS or I/O signals.
The state signals of non-intelligent part are introduced to LOU by means of the
connection point. The key controlling signals such as the initiative excitation power,
failure of inversion and the switch of de-excitation are exported through the
connection point, too.
To finish its operation, the logic of this board includes: control of excitation
flashing, control of the switch for channel tracking, control of the switch for
systematic voltage tracking, testing for failure of inversion, PSS control of manual
2-41
switch, ect. For detailed operational process please refer to related chapters for
software use.
There is a restoring button “ SW1”, which enables people to independently restore
the board.
3.2.8.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers

(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and the linkers.
Name Introducing foot Functions
X3 6PIN DC24V power terminal &power testing
X4 6PIN Wiring terminal & communication terminal of
CAN BUS
J5 34PIN Linked with the switch board J1
JTAG1 10PIN Programming interface JTAG
LED1~LED8 Line 8 output director light
LED9 5V Power director
LED10 3.3V Power director
JP1 2PIN Permit /prohibit program
LK1 2PIN Resistor jumper on CAN BUS terminal resistance
(2) Definition for the wiring terminal X1
Terminal Code No. Signal definition Correspondent Signals explain
No. MCU address
1 X30 P5.7 Switch quantity input

2-42

11 X3A P4.5 Switch quantity input
12 X3B P4.4 Switch quantity input
13 X3C P4.3 Switch quantity input
14 X3D P4.2 Switch quantity input
15 X3E P4.1 Switch quantity input
16 X3F P4.0 Switch quantity input
Terminal Code No. Signal definition Correspondent Signals explain
No. MCU address
1 O1 P7.0 Relay point output
9 C1 O1~O8 output
terminal
10 DGND1 24V power spot
11 Y4F AVR P3.7 Output signal
Communicative
state
12 Y4E Failure of P3.6 Output signal
inversion
2-43
13 Y4D Error of the P3.5 Output signal

de-excitation
switch
14 Y4C >50%If0 P3.4 Output signal
15 Y4B Excitation power P3.3 Output signal
16 Y42 Input of electric Output signal
braking
Terminal No. Code No. Function Remarks
1 R601 24V Power
2 R602 24V power spot
(5) Socket J5
Refer to chapter 3.2.7.2 “(11) definition for socket J1”.
3.2.9 Intelligent IO board

The No. of the IO board in the EXC9000 excitation system is IIU. This board
comprises a SCM, CAN BUS interface, photoelectric isolation system, serial
communicative interface, output relay and a controlling circuit. The CAN BUS
receives signals from the excitation system and then translates it into I/O signals. On
the one hand, the signals are exported through the relay connection point, so that the
monitored control system in the power plant can introduce the excitation information
through connection point. . On the other, IIU can also be connected with the
monitored control system in the power plant through the RS485 serial communicative
interface.
the board.
There can be flexible definition by special software for the relay signals exported
from the IO board.
2-44
3.2.9.2 Definition for wiring terminals and linkers on the IO
board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers.
X7 6PIN Wiring terminal, CAN BUS terminal
X8 2PIN DC24V power terminal
X9 2PIN 485 communicative terminal
J13 3PIN Serial communicative terminal
JTAG1 10PIN JATG programming interface
LED1~LED48 48 line output director light
LED49 5Vpower director
LED50 3.3V power director
LED51 CAN communicative director
LED52 Stand-by
JP2 2PIN Permit/prohibit programming
LK1 2PIN Resistor jumper on CAN BUS terminal
(2) Definition for terminal point X1~X6
Relay MUC Code. Terminal Terminal Code. MUC Relay
address No. No. No. No. address
O1 X1-1 X6-16 O48
K1 P3.0 P2.7 K48
C1 X1-2 X6-15 C6
O2 X1-3 X6-14 O47

K2 P3.1 P2.6 K47
C1 X1-4 X6-13 C6
2-45
O3 X1-5 X6-12 O46

K3 P3.2 P2.5 K46
C1 X1-6 X6-11 C6
O4 X1-7 X6-10 O45

K4 P3.3 P2.4 K45
C1 X1-8 X6-9 C6
O5 X1-9 X6-8 O44

K5 P3.4 P2.3 K44
C1 X1-10 X6-7 C6
K6 P3.5 O6 X1-11 X6-6 O43 P2.2 K43
C1 X1-12 X6-5 C6
O7 X1-13 X6-4 O42

K7 P3.6 P2.1 K42
C1 X1-14 X6-3 C6
O8 X1-15 X6-2 O41

K8 P3.7 P2.0 K41
C1 X1-16 X6-1 C6
O9 X2-1 X5-16 O40

K9 P6.0 P5.7 K40
C2 X2-2 X5-15 C5
O10 X2-3 X5-14 O39

K10 P6.1 P5.6 K39
C2 X2-4 X5-13 C5
O11 X2-5 X5-12 O38

K11 P6.2 P5.5 K38
C2 X2-6 X5-11 C5
O12 X2-7 X5-10 O37

K12 P6.3 P5.4 K37
C2 X2-8 X5-9 C5
O13 X2-9 X5-8 O36

K13 P6.4 P5.3 K36
C2 X2-10 X5-7 C5
O14 X2-11 X5-6 O35

K14 P6.5 P5.2 K35
C2 X2-12 X5-5 C5
O15 X2-13 X5-4 O34

K15 P6.6 P5.1 K34
C2 X2-14 X5-3 C5
O16 X2-15 X5-2 O33

K16 P6.7 P5.0 K33
C2 X2-16 X5-1 C5
O17 X3-1 X4-16 O32

K17 P7.0 P4.7 K32
C3 X3-2 X4-15 C4
O18 X3-3 X4-14 O31

K18 P7.1 P4.6 K31
C3 X3-4 X4-13 C4
O19 X3-5 X4-12 O30

K19 P7.2 P4.5 K30
C3 X3-6 X4-11 C4
2-46
O20 X3-7 X4-10 O29

K20 P7.3 P4.4 K29
C3 X3-8 X4-9 C4
O21 X3-9 X4-8 O28

K21 P7.4 P4.3 K28
C3 X3-10 X4-7 C4
O22 X3-11 X4-6 O27

K22 P7.5 P4.2 K27
C3 X3-12 X4-5 C4
O23 X3-13 X4-4 O26

K23 P7.6 P4.1 K26
C3 X3-14 X4-3 C4
O24 X3-15 X4-2 O25

K24 P7.7 P4.0 K25
C3 X3-16 X4-1 C4
(3) Definition for wiring terminal X7

1 CAN+ CAN BUS communication
3 CAN- CAN BUS communication
5 GND2 CAN BUS communication Linked to the spot
1 R601 24V power
1 A DATA:- 485 communicative
terminal
2 B DATA:+ 485 communicative
terminal
2-47
3.2.10 The human-machine interface in the regulator ---color
liquid crystal touch screen

The human-machine interface of the regulator is the main tool for communication
between the regulator and the operators, with the following main functions:
(1) Display:
The operational data display, operational state display, and error warning
display
(2) Operation:
Through the touch buttons of the human-machine interface, operators can set
the data, initiate excitation, switch on and off the function of residual voltage
flashing, track the channels, track the system voltage and adjust the
Deviation.
(3) Alarm:
When there’s something wrong with the excitation system, there will be
image of error alarm.
(4) Error tracing:
The interface has a thorough record of errors and restoring information for
the system, which can be used to trace back the information of more than 150
errors.
3.2.10.2 operation
For detailed information please refer to the “user’s guide” chapter 4 “ the
human-machine interface”.
3.3 Power supply

Tow 3-phase AC 380V power supplies introduced to the de-excitation cubicle,
facilitated each other as spare parts, within which there are automatic switch apparatus.
The AC power used in the excitation system (including the fan power, the transducer
power, illuminating and heating power) is all introduced through this cubicle.
2-48
The DC power of the excitation system is DC220V/DC110V, introduced from the

de-excitation cubicle. The DC includes the flash power, the DC controlling power
section I, the DC controlling power section II. If the DMX de-excitation switch is
used, special switch power should be increased.
(Attention: if there is only 2 excitation cubicles in the EXC9000 system, only one
line of AC power is needed introducing to the regulator, and the DC power is to be
linked to the regulator directly.)
The power of the weak current operation system is DC24V, including the operation
power for regulator and the power of impulse triggering.
The operation power for the DC 24V is supplied by 2 independent DC24V power
through the voltage transformer inside the excitation system and the DC controlling
power. Both have independent switches, lying on the guide rails inside the flank of the
regulator cubicle. When the generator is in normal condition, either of the breaks of
the 2-power supply would not affect the operation of the system.
The primary power of the voltage transformer comes from the input terminal of
rectifier cubicle. Generally, once the voltage on the generator terminal exceeds 60%
of the rated circuit voltage, the automatic voltage transformer would work normally.
The operating power of the work controller in the regulator is ±12V and +5V, also
supplied by the voltage transformer and the DC power, through which the electricity
is transferred to A/B channel respectively. Each channel has its own independent
switch, when one of the power supply is switched off, the other would not be affected.
4 Rectifier cubicle
4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle
Tow rectifier cubicle redundancy modes may be provided based on user’s
requirements, namely single-bridge mode, and parallel running mode.
900M
2-49
Graph 1-8 Single-bridge mode
900M
900M
900M
Graph 1-9 Parallel running
4.2 The major components of each rectifier cubicle

There are 2 kinds of rectifier cubicle compatible with the regulator cubicle in the
EXC9000 excitation system, namely, the intelligent rectifier cubicle and the
conventional rectifier cubicle. First, the intelligent rectifier cubicle would be
introduced.
4.3 Intelligent rectifier cubicle

The major components of each rectifier cubicle are
6 crystal break tube components (silicon + heatsinker)
6 fast fuses with contact indictor
6 impulse voltage transformer with high voltage tolerance
1 set of integrated interrupted RC protection device
1 or 2 mutually standby fans
1 or 2 wind pressure points for on-off monitoring of the 2 fans
1 rectifier cubicle intelligent controlling board
1 pulse board
1 LCD display with touching buttons
3 current sensors
1 or 2 temperature-measuring resistor to check temperature of fan wind
2-50
4.3.1 intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle

The intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle consists of a SCM, CAN BUS
interface, photoelectric isolation circuit and its controlling circuit. Signals from
the rectifier cubicle are sent to the SCM through the screen or the connecting
wiring terminal. The SCM would export the processed signals, the output signals
are then sent to the screen or through the photoelectric isolation circuit and the
control circuit, and last of all, they would be used to control the operation.
This board can be used in intelligent testing and controlling, realizing the
testing of bridge-arm current, the testing of cool wind temperature, the monitoring
of fast fuse, the monitoring of resistor capacitance protection, the monitoring of
wind pressure measurement, the controlling of intelligent balancing current, the
controlling of on/off the fans, the adjustment of the current display in rectifier
cubicle, the settings of the rectifier cubicle, and the communication of CAN, ect.
When it is off, there’s signal sent to the excitation regulator.
The main layout of this board:
8-line relay output (4 of the contacts has the common point)
8-line optical coupling input
6-line A/D
2-line temperature-measuring input
2-line D/A
CAN BUS interface
1 LCD display driving interface
JTAG programming interface
the board.
4.3.1.2 definition of wiring terminal and linkers on the
2-51
rectifier cubicle
(1) Definition for the jumpers, the potentiometer and the linkers.
Name Introducing Functions
foot
X3 10PIN DC24V power terminal
X4 6PIN Wiring terminal, CAN BUS communicative
terminal
X5 3PIN 1# resistor for temperature measurement wiring
terminal
X6 3PIN 2# resistor for temperature measurement wiring
terminal
J2 26PIN Linked with the screen
JTAG1 10PIN JTAG programming interface
W1, W2 Potential device for temperature adjustment
KEY1.1 Lock the systematic image
KEY1.2 On/off of the intelligent equal flow
KEY1.3 Setting for CAN communicative stations
KEY1.4
J3 (Impulse) standby
LED1 5V Power indicator
LED2 3.3V Power indicator
JP1 Permit/prohibit programming
LK1 Resistor jumper at the CAN BUS terminal
Function for Key 1:
2-52
Code Functions
1 Off: prohibit the adjustment of data
On: permit the adjustment of data
2 Off: withdraw of the intelligent equal flow
On: input of the intelligent equal flow
Setting of the No. 1 rectifier
00：3off, 4off
3 rectifier cubicle cubicle
No. 2 rectifier
01: 3off, 4on
cubicle
No. 3 rectifier
10: 3on, 4off
cubicle
No. 4 rectifier
11: 3on, 4on
cubicle
Terminal Code No. Definition of the Correspond Signal
No. signals ent MCU explanation
address
1 R601 24V power +
2 R601 24V power +
5 C1 Output common O1~O3 Output
point common terminal
6 C1 Output common O1~O3 Output
7 L04 Darlington output P5.3
8 O1 Contact output P5.0
9 O2 Contact output P5.1 On/off A fan
10 O3 Contact output P5.2 On/off B fan
2-53

Terminal No. Code No. Definition of Correspondent Signal
the signals MCU address explanation
1 D11.4 Switch quantity P4.4 Pulse cutting
input status
2 D11.5 Switch quantity P4.5 Wind pressure
input Contact of Fan A
3 D11.6 Switch quantity P4.6 Wind pressure
input Contact of Fan B
4 D11.7 Switch quantity P4.7 Fast fuse contact
input of the rectifier
cubicle
5 D11.0 Switch quantity P4.0 Fast fuse contact
input of resistor
capacitance
protection
6 D11.1 Switch quantity P4.1
input
input
input
9 DGND1
10 DGND1
Hole sensor power +(霍尔变送器)

（4）Definition for the wiring terminal X3
1 +12V Power +12V
2 －12V Hole sensor power - Power –12V
2-54
3 AGND Power spot Power spot

4 DA00(PA Current of Rectifier +bridge Analogue quantity
＋) arm output
5 DA10(PA Current of Rectifier +bridge Analogue quantity
－) arm output
6 PULSEOFF Pulse cutting
7 AGND Analogue spot
8 ADIN3 Rectifier A-phase current Analogue quantity
input
9 ADIN2 Rectifier B-phase current Analogue quantity
input
10 ADIN1 Rectifier C-phase current Analogue quantity
input

5 GND2 CAN BUS communication Linked to the
spot
6 GND2 CAN BUS communication

1 Resistor Signals for Output of current
temperature-measurement
2 Resistor Signals for Signals for
temperature-measurement temperature
measurement
2-55
3 Resistor Signals for Analogue spot


1 Resistor Signals for Output of
temperature-measurement current
2 Resistor Signals for Signals for
temperature-measurement temperature
measurement
3 Resistor Signals for Analogue spot
（8）Definition for socket J2
1 2 DGND1 Common
spot
+5V power 3 4 VO
Write +5 5 6 +5 +5V power
Common spot WR 7 8 CD Control
Restore DGND1 9 10 DB0 Data
Data RST 11 12 DB2 Data
Data DB1 13 14 DB4 Data
Data DB3 15 16 DB6 Data
Data DB5 17 18 DGND1 Common
spot
Negative light DB7 19 20 DGND1 Common
spot
Touching B+ 21 22 KEY22 Touching
button F1 button F2
Touching KEY11 23 24 KEY44 Touching
2-56
button F3 button F4
Touching KEY33 25 26 +5 +5V power
button F5
4.3.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers of impulse
board
4.3.3 control of the intelligent rectifier cubicle

There is an intelligent control system in each rectifier cubicle, which comprises
intelligent detecting unit, communication interface, transformer, LCD display and
corresponding input/out circuits etc. With introduction of intelligent control system,
conventional gauges and indicators are abolished and operation, control, status
monitoring, information transmission and information display of the rectifier cubicle
are intelligent
Intelligent industrial condition detecting
The intelligent control system affects omnidirectional detecting of rectifier
with the following detecting functions.
• Bridge-arm current and single-bridge output current
• Fast fuse status (including RC protective fast fusing)
• Temperature detecting at air inlet and air outlet
• On-off status of fans
• Wind pressure detecting
• On/off status of the rectifier
Intelligent industrial condition display
On the door of each rectifier cubicle, there is a LCD display with touching buttons
for display of various statuses of the rectifier cubicle and for achievement of
corresponding operations, as shown in the following pictures.
2-57
Button of
Display of
function
bridge arm
Display Display of
of air fiction
Intelligent information transmission

Local BUS technique is adopted in intelligent rectifier cubicle, through which
the switch quantity signal and analogue quantity signal of rectifier cubicle are
transmitted to regulator or directly to control system of power station. This not
only increases information transmission, but also decreases notably connection
lines between cubicles with improvement on both working reliability of the
system and the integral technique of the equipment.
调节柜
现场总线
......
1#功率柜 2#功率柜 3#功率柜灭磁柜
Intelligent fan control

When the rectifier cubicle detect the “start” command in the excitation system, or
the output current is over 100A, the fan is activated automatically; without the “start”
command and the output current is lower than 50A, the fan stops working
2-58
automatically.
In case cooling of rectifier cubicle adopts double-fan redundancy, the standby fan
can be chosen through the operating buttons on the control panel. This intelligent
control can increase availability of the fan and prolong its life expectancy. In case of
any fault in the running fan, e.g. phase loss of fan, low wind pressure etc, and standby
fan is automatically in use and the running fan is switched off at the same time.
4.4 Pulse formation

The pulse signal transmitted by excitation regulator is 120°wide pulse, which, after
60KHZ pulse series signal modulation by pulse panel of rectifier cubicle, is converted
to high-frequency pulse series signal as shown in the following diagram.
8us 8uS
1200
Typical output traits of pulse circuit are shown in the following oscillogram.
2-59
4.5 intelligent current balancing

For several parallel connected rectifier cubicle, long-line current balancing, reactor
balancing, magnet ring balancing are usually adopted at present, which must match
with parameters of silicon components, otherwise balancing effects will not be
satisfactory. On the one hand, these balancing measures impose higher requirements
on quality and quantity of spare parts. On the other hand, traits of silicon components
and contact resistor of major circuit of rectifier cubicle may vary with the time, which
may result in change in current distribution. Intelligent balancing technique is ensured
that balancing coefficient will be higher than 97% without any other auxiliary
measures (such as long cable, matching of parameters of silicon components etc).
What’s more, after one or more rectifier cubicle make their exit; intelligent balancing
can still be achieved among working rectifier cubicles.
The intelligent balancing technique is based on control circuit, effects among
cubicles and inter-phase balancing through automatic regulation. In this way, the
major circuit may be connected with no balancing components. As a result, it not only
overcomes defects of conventional balancing techniques, but also effects high-level
balancing coefficients efficiently with consistency.
Current balancing automatic regulator is composed of the following units as pulse
interval formation, interval front line slope dealing, current deviation amplification,
pulse interval phase shift, pulse switching control, high-frequency pulse producer,
pulse array formation, pulse power amplification etc.
Pulse switching control unit in the automatic balancing regulator functions in two
ways. Firstly it is controlled by operating command of this cubicle or external
command and high-frequency pulse output is “for bidden” if necessary; Secondly it
matches with multi-cubicle parallel total output current and when pulse of this cubicle
is forbidden, branch current of total output current signal in this cubicle is also
automatically and simultaneously switched off so that current given value of cubicles
is the average of total current divided by number of working cubicles.
2-60
4.6 Pulse transformer

Two types of pulse transformers are designed in accordance with insulation
requirements.
The first type adopts vacuum epoxy casting technique. Its dielectric strength is
15,000-volt line-frequency without being penetrated for 1 minute. It is installed
independently on silicon components.
The second type has a dielectric strength of 5,000-volt line frequency without
being penetrated for 1 minute. It is installed on pulse amplification board
4.7 Long-distance transmission of pulse

Considering demands by some users of different locations of regulator and rectifier
cubicle, corresponding pulse circuits are designed to satisfy demands of long-distance
transmission of pulse. Its principle is light-current signals are converted to
heavy-current signals in regulator and are subject to long-distance transmission to
rectifier cubicle for further voltage division, isolation and amplification to drive pulse
transformer. To this end, a six-phase pulse transformer is installed in regulator, which
converts light-current signals into heavy-current signals. There is also a pulse
receiving board installed in rectifier cubicle, which ensures that the heavy-current
pulse signals, after voltage division by resistor, drives pulse transformer.
4.8 R-C protection

In excitation system, over-voltage may occur in AC/DC circuits for various reasons,
which can be external or internal: the former is mainly from atmosphere over-voltage
in power system or switch working over-voltage in excitation transformer, while the
latter is mainly from over-voltage in rectification and phase change of SCR in circuit
or internal faults of circuit etc. The occurrence of over-voltage may result in
over-voltage penetration of rectifying components of SCR. For this reason,
over-voltage protection circuit shall be installed.
In EXC-9000 system, rectifier cubicle AC side over-voltage protection and
phase-change over-voltage protection of silicon components adopt integrated RC
absorbing circuit with advantages like small volume, simple installation and reliable
2-61
protection etc. The circuit is shown in the following diagram.
4.9 Conventional rectifier cubicle

Major components of each cubicle:
6 SCR components
6 fast fusers with indicator
6-pulse voltage transformer
1set of isolated RC protection equipment
1 or 2 mutual stand-by fans
Normal machinery instrument and indicator light
Compared to the intelligent rectifier cubicle system, the conventional system is
more concise in structure and function as well. Without the intelligent controlling unit
and other corresponding testing parts, the data and signals for sampling and
monitoring are limited to a small range. The indicators for signals are mainly
indicator lights, and the parameter such as the output current is mainly shown by
machinery display instrument.
It doesn’t adopt the local BUS mode as other units for signal output. In stead, the
mode of relay connection is adopted, which, results in less information transmission
and more connecting wires among cubicles.
The current balancing among cubicles is mainly ensured by parameter matching
through SCR or long-line current balancing.
2-62
5. De-excitation and over-voltage protection

5.1 Block diagram of de-excitation and over-voltage
protection circuit
The typical de-excitation and over-voltage principle block diagram is as follows.
-QFG -RD
-FR
-LGE
-V61 -V62
-A61
-CT
Diagram 1-10 de-excitation major circuit principle diagram

In the diagram:
QFG-Field circuit breaker
FR-energy-flow resistor
RD-rapid fuse
V61-diode
V62-SCR
A61-SCR trigger
CT-Over-voltage performance detector
In case of normal switch-off of excitation system, the regulator automatically
inverts for de-excitation; in case of an accidental switch-off, Field circuit breaker and
rotor field energy is shifted to non-linear resistor for de-excitation.
When the generator is not working normally, e.g. slip pole, an induced voltage will
be produced in the rotor circuit. Now rotor over-voltage detecting unit A61 installed
on rotor circuit will detect positive-direction over-voltage signal of rotor. And then the
V62 silicon controlled components will be triggered immediately, the non-linear
resistor unit FR will be in parallel connected into rotor circuit and the incurred
2-63
over-voltage energy will be eliminated through energy absorbing function of

consuming resistor; And the negative-direction over-voltage signals in rotor circuit
will be transmitted to absorbed energy by non-linear resistor by the way of V61 diode
to ensure refrain of open circuit of the generator rotor and reliable protection of the
rotor insulation from damage. Due to this protection, the rotor windings will generate
an adverse magnetic field, neutralize the reversing field generated by negative
sequence current of stators to protect surface of rotors and rotor protective ring against
burning.
In concert with over-voltage protection, corresponding command signals are sent to
monitoring system through monitoring current signals of mutual inductor CT.
Field circuit breaker may be installed either on DC side or on AC side.
The major advantage to adopt AC de-excitation is simple selection of AC switch,
mature manufacturing technology, low production cost, safer guarantee rendered for
detecting and maintenance by installation of Field circuit breaker on AC side. The
smaller rated current than DC side may also be used in rectifier’s fault protection. Its
defects are bad arc-interruption efficiency, low arc voltage. So pulse shall also be cut,
otherwise energy can´t be transferred through inversion. In case of generator short
circuit, excitation transformer secondary side short circuit etc, the AC voltage is zero,
inversion conditions are not ready, which results in fault in AC de-excitation.
When the same switch is installed on DC side, shutoff arc voltage is 1.5 times of
that on AC side, which is great advantage to inversion. The installation of switch on
DC side may also defend against faults in initializing excitation and electrical braking
processes. It is best to install Field circuit breaker on DC side for large-scale
generating set.
De-excitation resistor can be ZnO or Sic. And linear resistor can also be used. The
design of de-excitation resistor should take consideration of arc voltage of circuit
breaker in the field circuit breaker, the maximum voltage allowed by excitation
windings as well as possible maximum energy in excitation windings.
Upon receipt of excitation protection tripping command from generator protection
or from within, filed circuit breaker is disconnected, pulse is discontinued, and
through the negative diode the excitation current flows to the de-excitation resistor. In
2-64
the de-excitation circuit with the SCR installed in the negative direction, when the
filed circuit breaker is disconnected and pulse is discontinued, the SCR connector is
triggered. After this measure is adopted, secondary AC voltage of excitation
transformer is superposed to electric arc voltage of filed circuit breaker to ensure
reliable energy shift and shortening de-excitation time.
Conv Field flashing Conv Field flashing
Discharge Discharge
FCB
SCB SSD
FFB FFB
Crowbar Crowbar
Batt Batt
RE RE
Diagram 1-11 Field circuit breaker installed on DC side Diagram 1-12Fieldcircuit breaker installed on AC side
5.2 Allocation of the de-excitation cubicle

There are 2 types of de-excitation cubicles in EXC9000 excitation system: the
intelligent de-excitation cubicle and the conventional de-excitation cubicle. The
intelligent de-excitation cubicle would be first introduced.
5.3 Intelligent de-excitation cubicle

The intelligent de-excitation cubicle is mainly composed of :
A filed circuit breaker
A set of de-excitation resistor (linear or non-linear )
A set of SCR crowbar unit
A LCD display with touching buttons
A controlling board for intelligent de-excitation
A DC transducer board
A set of DC voltage and current transducer
5.3.1 the controlling board for intelligent de-excitation

The hard ware circuit of this board is identical to that of the rectifier cubicle
2-65
intelligent control board.
5.3.1.1 Definition for the wiring terminal and linkers on this
board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers:
Name Introducing foot Function
X3 10PIN Power terminal DC24V
X4 6PIN Wiring terminal, CAN BUS communicative
terminal
X5 3PIN
X6 3PIN
J2 26PIN Linked with the display
JTAG1 10PIN The programming interface JTAG
W1,W2
KEY1.1 The system image lock
KEY1.2
KEY1.3
KEY1.4
J3
J4
J5
J6
LED1 5V POWER INDICATOR
LED2 3.3V POWER INDICATOR
JP1 PROHIBIT/PERMIT PROGRAMMING
LK1 TERMINAL RESISTOR JUMPER AT CAN BUS
Functions explained for Key 1
2-66
Dialing code Functions explained

1 Off: no permit of parameter adjustment
On: permit of parameter adjustment
（2）Definition for wiring terminal X1
Terminal Code Signals definition Corresponding Signals explanation
No. No. MCU address
1 R601 24V Power +
2 R601 24V Power +
3 R602 24V Power spot
4 R602 24V Power spot
5 C1 Output common O1~O3output
6 C1 Output common O1~O3output
7 L04 Darlington output P5.3
8 O1 Contacting output P5.0 >90%Uge Signal
9 O2 Contacting output P5.1 Collective
de-excitation
switch
10 O3 Contacting output P5.2 Divided
de-excitation
switch
Terminal Code No. Signals definition Corresponding Signals
No. MCU address explanation
1 D11.4 Switch quantity P4.4 DC current I
input Powered off
2 D11.5 Switch quantity P4.5 DC current II
input Powered off
2-67
3 D11.6 Switch quantity P4.6 AC powered

input off
4 D11.7 Switch quantity P4.7 De-excitation
input switch on
5 D11.0 Switch quantity P4.0 De-excitation
input switch divided
6 D11.1 Switch quantity P4.1 Rotor
input over-voltage
protection
input
input
9 DGND1 Digital spot
10 DGND1 Digital spot

1 +12V +12V power
2 －12V -12V power
3 AGND Power spot
4 DA00(PA＋) Analogue quantity output
5 DA10(PA－) Analogue quantity output
6 PULSEOFF
7 AGND Analogue spot
8 ADIN3 Analogue quantity input
9 ADIN2 Excitation Analogue quantity input
current
10 ADIN1 Excitation Analogue quantity input
voltage
2-68

5 GND2 CAN BUS communication Linked to the
screening spot
6 GND2 CAN BUS communication
（6）Socket J2
Functions Definition Line No. Definition Function
1 2 Common spot
+5VPOWER +5 3 4
WRITE WR 5 6 +5VPower
COMMON SPOT DGND1 7 8 Control
RESTORE RST 9 10 Data
DATA DB1 11 12 Data
DATA DB3 13 14 Data
DATA DB5 15 16 Data
DATA DB7 17 18 Common spot
Back light B+ 19 20 Common spot
Touching button KEY11 21 22 Touching button
F1 F2
Touching button KEY33 23 24 Touching button
F3 F4
Touching button KEY55 25 26 +5VPower
F5
2-69
5.3.2 Intelligent functions

With introduction of the intelligent control system, conventional gauges and
indicators are abolished and operation, control, status monitoring, information
transmission, information display etc are intelligent as follows.
Display of
Button of
analogy
function
Numbers
Display of
function
Measuring of excitation voltage and excitation current

Computation of rotor winding temperature
Display of working status of de-exciter, including location of switch,
excitation voltage, excitation current, rotor temperature, switch performance
times, crowbar performance times etc.
2-way high-speed transmission of information through mutual connection
between CANBUS and regulator as well as rectifier cubicle.
5.3.3 measurement of the rotor temperature

Rotor temperature is measured through computation of resistance of excitation
winding as shown in the following formula.
Rf
−1
Rf0
Tf =
α
In the formula,
Tf = Rotor temperature
Rfo = 0°C Rotor temperature
2-70
α = Resistance temperature coefficient of rotor winding materials [1/°C]

The measured results of rotor temperature may be displayed on spot or remotely
and may also be used for alarm indicating.
5.3.4 crowbar
5.3.4.1 the operation principle of crowbar

Traits of different types of Field circuit breaker are considered in design of crowbar
and its triggering board with attention to mutual requirements of de-excitation and
over-voltage protection. The core component of triggering board is BOD, the major
characteristics of which is it is on-state in case voltage difference between its anode
and cathode reaches its break-over voltage, and it is interdicted when the voltage
difference is lower than break-over voltage. Besides, the small difference of
performance-regulated value is convenient for designing and experimenting.
Generally speaking, SCR initialization in rotor over-voltage protection circuit is
executed through voltage division by resistors. Its main disadvantage is that, in case of
change in characteristic parameters of silicon components, serial resistors shall be
matched otherwise to maintain certain on-state voltage, which incurs inconvenience
for maintenance. However, the adoption of BOD components in crowbar initialization
may precisely rectify over-voltage protection performance value without special
maintenance.
In the following Diagram there are sketch maps of 3 different types of crowbar
circuits. Map (a) is two SCR reverse parallel connection, which is fit for linear
resistors or SiC; Map (b) is SCR in positive direction and diode in negative direction,
which is fit for ZnO; Map (c) is 1-line SCR added in negative direction based on Map
(a), which improves de-excitation reliability.
Due to the use of crowbar, when de-excitation resistor adopts linear resistors or
SiC, it is not restricted to the use of Field circuit breaker with closed contacts.
2-71
FCB FCB FCB
Crowbar
Crowbar Crowbar
RE RE RE
(a) (b) (c)

Diagram 3 types of crowbar circuits
5.3.4.2 Definition for wiring terminal and linkers on Crowbar

(1) Definition for potential device and linkers
Terminal No. Code No. Signal definition Signal explanation
1 QFG～1 Linked with the Linked to the positive pole
closed contact in the of DC220V power line-I
field circuit breaker through the contact point,
with the DC220V power
relay coil inside
2 602 Linked with the negative
Negative pole of the
3 602 pole of DC220V power
DC power line-I
line-I
4 QFG～2 Linked with the field Linked to the positive pole
circuit breaker of DC220V power line-II
Closed contact point through the contact point,
2-72
relay coil inside

5 602’ Negative pole of the Linked with the negative
6 602’ DC power line-II pole of DC220Vpower
line-II
7 Linked with DC220V+
through the contact point,
relay coil inside
8 Same point of terminal 8,9
9
10
Terminal No Code No. Function Remarks
1 K2 Control pole - Trigger the
2 G2 Control pole + negative direction
SCR to be on-state
3 K3 Control pole - Trigger the
4 G3 Control pole + negative direction
SCR to be on-state
5 G1 Control pole + Trigger the positive
6 K1 Control pole - direction SCR to be
on-state
7
5.3.5 DC transducer board

The serial number of the DC transducer board for de-exciter in the EXC9000
system is BSB, composed of the rotor over-voltage testing circuit and the excitation
voltage, excitation current signal detect circuit. The rotor over-voltage testing circuit
is used to test whether the over-voltage protection of the rotor circuit is working and
2-73
whether the de-exciter is at work, whose signals would then be sent to the intelligent
unit board. The unit board is responsible for recording and sending the signals to the
switch quantity board to cut the –A-phase pulse. The detect circuit sends the
excitation voltage and current signals to the de-exciter intelligent control board after
dealing.
5.3.5.2 Definition for DC transducer wiring terminal and
linkers
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential devices and linkers
Name Introducing foot Function
No.
1 R658 Rotor over-voltage To the switch quantity
protection, cut -A-phase board, cut -A-phase
impulse impulse
2 01K1 Testing current signals in the Output of the current
3 01K2 de-exciter resistor circuit mutual inducer
4 R658’ Output alarm of rotor Send signals through the

over-voltage protection de-exciter intelligent
board
5 UL out Excitation voltage Sample through
measurement signals de-exciter intelligent
board
6 IL out Excitation voltage Sample through
measurement signals de-exciter intelligent
board
2-74
7 COM Common terminal for signal

testing
10 R601 24V power +
Terminal No. Code No. Functions Remarks
1 UL- Excitation voltage signal -
2
3 UL+ Excitation voltage signal + Terminal 3, 4 short
4 RV1=100k resistor circuit linked
5 RV2=100k resistor internally, RV linked
6 between terminal 4,5

Terminal 5,6 short
circuit linked
internally
7 IL- Excitation current signals Signals are the 75mV
signals exported from
the current divider
8
9 Terminal 9,10 short
10 IL+ Excitation current signals + circuit linked
internally
5.5 Conventional de-exciter

Each de-exciter mainly contains:
A field circuit breaker
A set of de-excitation resistor
A set of SCR linkers
A set of DC voltage and current transducer
2-75
Conventional machinery instrument and indicator lights

Compared to the intelligent de-exciter, the conventional system is more concise in
structure and function as well. Without the intelligent controlling unit and other
corresponding testing parts, the data and signals for sampling and monitoring are
limited to a small range. The indicators for signals are mainly indicator lights, and
the parameter such as the output current is mainly shown by machinery instrument.
It doesn’t adopt the local BUS mode as other units for signal output. In stead, the
mode of relay is adopted, which, results in less information transmission and more
connecting wires among cubicles.
6. Flashing unit
The EXC 9000 excitation system adopts 2 ways of flash: generator residual voltage
flash and the external auxiliary power flash. The residual voltage flash can be
switched on and off by the buttons on the human-machine interface in the regulator.
Rapid pulse array technique is adopted for residual voltage flash. In the flashing
process, 10V~20V voltage is enough at input terminal of SCR commuter for normal
working. In case the voltage is less than 10V~20V, SCR commuter will be initialized
repeatedly (diode working mode) to reach that level. However, the residual voltage
should not be too low, or the SCR would be of off-state, which requires an external
auxiliary power for flashing.
In case residual voltage flashing fails in 10 seconds, standby excitation flashing
circuit will be activated, which is used in achieving a voltage of 10V~20V. When the
terminal voltage reaches 10% of voltage of generator, standby-flashing circuit will
automatically stop working and the soft flashing process will be started immediately
to build up the voltage to expected level. Regulators realize the whole flashing
process and sequence control is realized through the LOU board, and the soft flashing
process controlled by the CPU in the regulator.
The external auxiliary power flashing circuit only needs a small current. In
principle, in case rated excitation current is less than 2000A, auxiliary flashing current
will not be more than 20A.
2-76
The standby flashing circuit is a modularized structure made up of an air switch,

flashing contact, diode and a current-limiting resistor.
The use of air switch is for manual switch on and off of the external flashing power.
The LOU board in the regulator controls the flashing contact.
The directory diode is used to counter-block the flashing power, preventing the
over-voltage in the rotor circuit form counter running into the external DC system in
the process of flashing. At the same time, the diode plays the role of commutating the
AC in the flashing power to DC.
The limited-current resistor is used to limit the current in the auxiliary power for
flashing, preventing the flashing current from being too huge to do damage to the
external DC system.
7. External testing units of PT, CT

The external testing units of PT, CT in EXC9000 excitation system includes the
following:
(1) Generator terminal PT
Generally 2 lines of signals, YY0-12 wiring mode, 3-phase and 3-wire input,
the 1st line of PT signals corresponds to the voltage feedback signals of Regulator
A; while the 2nd line PT signals corresponds to the voltage feedback signals in
regulator B and C. It is mainly used to test feedback voltage in the micro
computer regulator AVR unit, test over-voltage limitation input signals from FCR
unit and engine set frequency and compute the active and reactive power in the
generator sets after the PT is matched with the terminal CT.
(2) Power generator terminal CT
Generally it is the No. 1 Line signal, with 3-phase 4-line input, A/B
microcomputer regulator input, and it is mainly used to measure the current
signals of the stators in the generators. After it is matched with the terminal PT, it
can be used to compute the active and reactive power in the generator sets.
Besides, it is used to limit the generator overload.
(3) System PT
2-77
Generally it is one-line PT signals, YY0-12 wiring mode, 3-phase and 3-wire

input and A/B microcomputer regulator input. It is used to measure the voltage
signals in the grid. After the comparison with terminal PT, and the function input
of regulator “ systematic voltage tracking”, it can be used to regulate the terminal
voltage in the generator sets, so that the generator voltage can be consistent with
the system voltage, realizing automatic interconnection networking. and reducing
the interconnection impact.
8. Design of structure
8.1 cubicle structure
The cubicle is made up of front and back doors, the frame, the cladding boards
on both sides and the upper and lower base board. The frame is made of 2mm
C-shape galvanized channels with ample strength. The frame is covered with
1.5mm steel plate, which functions as separation and screening. The front door is
one-door structure while the back door is two-door structure.
8.2 Protection scale

The protection scale conforms to IEC529 and GB4208-93 standards. Protection
scales in common practice are IP21 and IP31. For the tropical climate, special
considerations have been given in designing process to casing radiation, surface
protection and seal plates etc.
8.3 Surface coating

Prior to assembly process, surfaces of the frame and steel plates are treated with
overall coating:
• The preliminary treatment includes degreasing, acid cleaning, phosphining
and scouring;
• Then static powder is utilized for spray coating;
• The overall thickness of coating should be 40~50μ with color on user’s
request.
2-78
8.4 Doorknobs
The doorknobs are in double keyway form and T-shape doorknobs with cylinder
locks and double keyway are available.
8.5 Main circuit

From AC input to field circuit breaker including mutual connections between
commuters up to DC output circuit, motherboard is applied.
8.6 Conducting wire

Standard tinning copper conducting wire is used. Its insulation is anti-flaming
and does not contain any PVC, which means no poisonous gas even in case of
burning. Flat cable is used for connection between printed circuit boards.
8.7 Wire sizes of the conducting wire

Standard wire sizes are as follows:
• Control circuit: 1.0 mm2
• Measuring circuit:
PT circuit： 1.0 mm2
CT circuit： 1.5 mm2
• Auxiliary power supply： 2.5 mm2
• Power circuit：accord with international standards.
8.9 Grade of conducting wire

Grades are available on interface terminals, which are printed by special
printer.
8.10 Terminals
Open terminals are used in measuring external power supply and current
circuits with maximum wire size as 2.5 mm2. Ordinary terminals are used in
control and signal circuits with maximum wire size as 2.5 mm2.
2-79
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Function illutration
Chapter3 Function illustration
1. Regulation.............................................................................. 4
1.1 Set value regulation and running mode................................. 4
1.2 AVR and FCR........................................................................ 4
1.3 Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ............................................. 6
1.4 Manual mode of working ...................................................... 9
1.4.1 Generation mode.......................................................... 9
1.4.2 Electric braking mode................................................ 10
1.4.3 Constant control angle mode ..................................... 11
1.4.4 Short circuit dry mode ............................................... 11
1.5 Active and reactive power compensate ............................... 12
1.6 Q drop compensate.............................................................. 12
1.7 Overlapped reactive power or power factor control............ 12
1.8 Soft flashing control............................................................ 13
1.9 Tracking among channels.................................................... 14
2. Functions of the limit.......................................................... 15

2.1 Limit of force excitation and over excitation ...................... 15
2.2 limit of under excitation ...................................................... 16
2.3 Stator current limit .............................................................. 17
2.4 V/F limit.............................................................................. 18
2.5 Low frequency .................................................................... 19

3-1
3. Fault detecting..................................................................... 19
3.1 Synchronization fault .......................................................... 19
3.2 Low excitation current ........................................................ 20
3.3 Excitation transformer secondary side CT fault.................. 20
3.4 PT fault................................................................................ 20
3.5 regulator fault...................................................................... 21
4. Fault prevention.................................................................. 21
4.1 Detection fault tolerance ..................................................... 21
4.2 Control fault tolerance......................................................... 21
5. Other functions ................................................................... 21

5.1 Signals R631 ....................................................................... 21
5.2 signals R632........................................................................ 22
5.3 Output of starting command................................................ 22
5.4 Restoring ............................................................................. 22
5.5 channel tacking ................................................................... 22
5.6 Internal tracking .................................................................. 22
5.7 Systemetic voltage tracking ................................................ 23
5.8 Constant Q control .............................................................. 23
5.9 Constant PF control............................................................. 23
5.10 Manual operation of excitation incrased or decreaced ...... 24
6. Logic flow diagram of the regulator.................................. 25

6.1 flow of start up .................................................................... 25
3-2
6.2 flow of stop ......................................................................... 26
6.3 flow of main CPU programme and breaking off................. 27
6.4 flow of DSP sampling programme and breaking off........... 28
6.5 flow of channel switching ................................................... 28
6.6 flow of channel tracking...................................................... 29
6.7 flow of systematic voltage tracking .................................... 29
3-3
1. Regulation
1.1 Setpoint value regulation and running mode
The increase, decrease or preset can be controlled with input of command via
switch quantity or input of signal via serial communication circuit. The set value has
maximum & minimum limits. Regulating pace of setting value may be set through
software.
There are two setting units in the regulator, namely voltage setting unit and current
setting unit, for constant generator voltage regulation and constant excitation current
regulation. When the regulator receives the command of stopping signal, it sets the
setting value at the minimum limit, while it sets the value at the initialization value
when it receives the command of start up. The manual operation of increasing or
decreasing excitation is to directly regulate the setting value, through which to
regulate the generator’s voltage or the reactive power.
Constant generator voltage regulation is called automatic regulation and constant
excitation current regulation, manual regulation. After the generator flashing to build
up the voltage, the two regulations will keep track of each other, i.e. the standby one
tracks the working one in that the two regulating output are equivalent. The tracking
cannot be relieved by manual work.
Automatic mode is the main operation mode, which is good for enhancing operational
stability in in the system. PSS workes with the automatic mode, which helps to
efficiently, contain the low-frequent agitation of the active power in the system.
The manual mode is an auxiliary mode, which cannot be used for a long space of
time.
Once the regulator is charged or restored, it is defaulted to the automatic mode.
These two working modes can be switched manually. In some cases like PT fault
they can also be automatically switched.
1.2 AVR and FCR

The function of AVR is to maintain constant generator voltage, so its feedback
quantity is terminal voltage of generator. To render the excitation system a good
3-4
static and dynamic performance, 2-level leading/lagging correction stages are

adopted in voltage regulators. Its mathematical model illustrated with transfer
function is shown in the following diagram.
Ugd
电压给定
Ug(S) 1 1+TA1S 1+TA3S UK(S)

Kp
电压反馈 1+TaS 1+TA2S 1+TA4S
附加控制
自动电压调节器（ AVR）数学模型
Diagram 2-1 Transfer function model of automatic voltage regulation

Explanation:
Ugd Setting value for voltage, 1%~120%
Ug Generator voltage for feedback
Ta Time constant for terminal voltage
measurement
Kp Kavr, amplification multiple of AVR Regulator software setting
TA1 Time constant for the 1st level of AVR Regulator software setting
TA2 leading/lagging stages Regulator software setting
TA3 Time constant for the 2nd level of AVR Regulator software setting
TA4 leading/lagging stages Regulator software setting
UK Control signals for the automatic
mode, ranges: 860~7600
Accessory Generally the output control signals
control from PSS
Excitation current regulator is used to realize the manual mode to maintain the
constant excitation current, with excitation current as feedback quantity. Its
mathematical model has just one-leading/lagging correction stage. Auxiliary control is
ineffective to excitation current regulators. The mathematical model of excitation
current relator is shown in the following diagram.
3-5
Igd
电流给定
IL(S) 1 1+TB1S UK2(S)

Ki
电流反馈 1+TbS 1+TB2S
励磁电流调节器数学模型
Diagram 3-2 Transfer function model of excitation current regulation

Explanation:
IL Excitation current, for current feedback
Igd Setting value for current
Tb Time constant in the excitation wave filter, Regulator software setting
no less than 0.04s
Ki Kair, amplification of FCR Regulator software setting
TB1 FCR leading/aging stage time constant Regulator software setting
TB2 Regulator software setting
UK2 Control signal of manual mode, ranges:
860~7600
FCR is mainly used in testing (eg. the generator short circuit testing in the process
of equipment transportation or maintanence), or as an auxiliary/tansmit control mode
in the AVR fault or PT fault.
In order to prevent terminal ovevoltage caused by the sudden load throw-off of the
generator in manual mode, the manual mode has the function of automatically
returning to the no-load state. In case the circuit breaker of the generator is tripped,
a pulse signal is sent to the regulator, so the current set value is set to no-load state.
If the regulator is operated in the manual mode, there’s also the limit of terminal
voltage. The voltage limit is the same with the V/F voltage limit, which can be used
to modify the regulation of software.
1.3 Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

Power system stabilizer abbreviated as PSS has the following functions.
3-6
a. Increasing static stability of power system;

b. Increasing dynamic stability of power system;
c. Amortizing low-frequency vibration of power system.
Principle of PSS:
One or two signals among ∆P、∆ω、∆f are used in excitation system for auxiliary
feedback control to increase positive amortizing. It neither decreases gains in voltage
ring of excitation system, nor affects transient performance of excitation control
system.
PSS is a standard software function for regulator in the EXC9000 excitation system.
The PSS we develop, adopts the accelerated power as the feedback signal (∆P、∆ω),
efficiently pvercoming the roblem of reactive power in the single power feedback.
Mathematical model of PSS is shown in the following diagram, belonging to the
PSS2A mode.
Diagram 3-3 Transfer function model

Explanation:
V1 Electrical angle speed ωm
V2 Power Pe
TW1 Stopping direct current stage 1 time constant Regulator software setting
3-7
Ks2 Compensation coefficient for power Regulator software setting
integrating counting
T7 Power integrating time constant Regulator software setting
Ks3 Matching signal coefficient Regulator software setting
M Trap filter stage number Regulator software setting
N Trap filter stage number Regulator software setting
T8 Trap filter time constant Regulator software setting
T9 Trap filter time constant when T9=O, Regulator software setting
0output of trap filter
Ks1 Gain of PSS Regulator software setting
T1 PSS leading/aging stage1 time constant Regulator software setting
T2 Regulator software setting
T3 PSS leading/aging stage2 time constant Regulator software setting
T4 Regulator software setting
PSS_uk Valid PSS output signal
USTmax PSS output positive limit, <+10% Regulator software setting
USTmin PSS output negative limit, >-10% Regulator software setting
PSS setting in Default 40%, based on the capacity of the Regulator software setting
Power generator
PSS setting off Default 35%, based on the capacity of the Regulator software setting
Power generator
PSS export the control signal of PSS_uk, through the auxiliary control terminal in
diagram 3-1, introducing AVR adding contact, identical to the adding method of
feedback voltage Ug.
Through human-machine interface of the regulation, PSS can be switched on or off.
If the PSS is switched on, only when the generator active power is higher than the
input power will the PSS output be effective.
3-8
When PSS is switched off, the output of PSS is ineffective, constantly eual to 0.
1.4 Manual mode of working

1.4.1 Generation mode
In the mode of generation, there are 2 operating modes: automatic mode and the
manual mode.
(1) Automatic mode. Such overlapping control signals as the stator current limit
Quegd, underexcitation limit Quegd, forceexcitation limit and overexcitation limit,

V/F limit VFgd, error regulating TCgd, assaccery control signals of PSS PSSgd
(PSS_uk), testing signals Testgd are increased on the base of the automatic voltage
regulator in diagram 3-1. The general control block diagram is shown in diagram
3-4. The overlapping way includes “+” and “-“.
U gd +
Quegd +
Qoegd −
VFgd − UKmax
TCgd −
Test gd +
PSS gd Ukauto
1 + TA1S 1 + TA3S
Ug Kavr
1 + TA2 S 1 + TA4 S
Il
Illim
UKmin
Diagram 3-4 General control model at generating mode

(2) Manual mode. The manual mode adopts the standard constant excitation contrl
mode, see diagram 3-4.
In the mode of generation, the 2 modes can be chosen manually. Should there
be PT error in the manual mode, the regulator will automatically switch the
automatic mode to the manual mode. Channels for the switch:
1) Switched to the automatic mode
a) Switch to automatic by Manual
b) PT error causes the software to switch to manual mode, then the start up
command restoring, and the system return to automatic mode
c) Recharged the system
3-9
d) The system switch its mode through other operating mode

2) Switched to the manual mode
a) Switch to manual mode by Manual
b) PT error makes the software switch to manual mode
1.4.2 Electric braking mode
Compared to the machinery mode, the electric braking mode has the adventages of
large moment, shorter time for stopping, no pollution, no limit of electric braking
speed and convenience of equipment maintenance and testing. Electric braking is
generally put into use when the system normally stops. Inside the regulator, elctric
mode is added, matching with the external operation of electric braking and logic
circuit, so as to make automatic stop. In the process of electric braking, reglator
controls the regulation and supplies a constant excitation current for the
generator-winding resistor. Its scale can be set according to the software in use.
In the electric braking mode, the control regulation is the same with the manal
mode. The set value of current is the value of electric braking, which can be set
through regulatory software.
To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering the electric braking
mode includes:
(1) The generator has stopped de-excitation, excitation current being 0
(2) Command for eletric braking
(3) Start up command after 5s later
The general condition and order for exiting the electric braking mode includes:
(1) First withdraw the input command, the regulator is automatically inverted
to de-excitation.
(2) 5s after inversion, withdraw the electric braking start up command
(3) When the regulator measures the excitation current as 0, the electric
braking mode is off while the generation mode is on.
The necessary logic operations, in the process of electric braking, such as the close
of short circuit switch and input of external excitation power supply, are generally
finished by the special logic control circuit set by the excitation system. The
3-10
programming of PLC is clearcut, simple, and convenient for modification according

to special situation.
1.4.3 Constant control angle mode

This is an open-loop regulation, only for the use of experiment. In the
other-excitation mode of the excitation power, the constant control angle mode can be
easily used to test the generator short circuit and test the genertor idle load
characteristics.
This mode can only be entered through thr regulator software.
To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering this mode is:
(1) Excitation current 0
(2) Entering to the “constant control angle mode” command through the regulatory
sotware
(3) Choosing the “enforced start up” command through the regulatory software
After entering into the constant control angle mode, the regulator would firstly
initialize and maximize the control output signals, ie Ukmax=7600. After this, the
control angle can be regulated through the regulatory software, or through the external
increasing/decreasing operation.
The general order for exiting the mode:
(1) First of all, decrease the excitation current to 0
(2) Choose the command of “exit the enforced start up” through regulatory software
(3) Choose to enter the command of “normal mode” through regulatory software,
which means to exit the constant control angle mode, and enter the generating
mode.
1.4.4 Short circuit dry mode

This is also an auxiliary working mode of the regulator, only for experiment. In the
other-excitation mode of the excitation power, the short circuit dry mode can be easily
used to test the generator short circuit and test the genertor idle load characteristics.
This mode can only be entered through thr regulator software. In this mode, the
control regulation mode is the same with the manual mode.
3-11
To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering this mode is:
(1) Excitation current 0
(2)Entering to the “short circuit dry mode” command through the regulatory sotware
(3) Choosing the “enforced start up” command through the regulatory software
After entering into the short circuit dry mode, the regulator would firstly initialize,
then transfers into the manual mode and set the current 0. After that, the current
setting value can be regulated through external excitation increasing or decreasing.
The general order for exiting the mode:
(1) First of all, decrease the excitation current to 0
(2) Choose the command of “exit the enforced start up” through regulatory software
(3) Choose to enter the command of “normal mode” through regulatory software,
which means to exit the short circuit dry mode, and enter the generating mode.
1.5 Active and reactive power compensate

To compensate voltage drop incurred by active or reactive power of unit
transformers and/or transmission lines, signals in proportion to static active power and
reactive power are added to the given voltage of the generator. The power back off
scope is between -15% and +15%, which is tunable.
1.6 Q drop compensate

To ensure rational distribution of reactive power between various serial
working-generating sets, deviation coeffcient function shall also be included, which is
realized by the given voltage of the generator minus signal in proportion with static
reactive power. The scope of power back off and deviation coefficient are between
-15% and +15% and tunable.
1.7 Overlapped reactive power or power factor control

The reactive power or power factor controlled can be regarded as added control of
AVR. In these two occasions, control signals root in difference between actual value
and controlled value of selected control mode. In addition, control signals work on
adding point of AVR through an Intergraph.
The working point in selected added to control mode can be set in the following
3-12
ways:
Human-machine interface;
Remote serial communication connection.
Q-Regulation Function
Cos-phi Regulation Function
P lower rise
raise
P rise
raise lower
lower
ϕ lower ϕ
Qreg
pre-
set cosϕ 1 cosϕ 2
pre-set
reset
Q1 Q2 Q
reset
Qcosphi reg. Q
Diagram 3-5 Principle of reactive and power factor control
1.8 Soft flashing control

Normally, the generator excitation system is established automatically.
Soft flashing aims at preventing generator voltage overregulation upon flashing. Upon
receipt of starting-up command, the automatic preset value of the voltage is 30%.
When the generator voltage reaches more than 30% of setting value, the regulator
increases pre-set value gradually at a tunable pace until generator voltage rises
gradually to pre-set value, which can be set through regulating software usually as
idle rated value. The waveform of flashing process records on300MW generating set
site is as follows.
3-13
Diagram 3-6 Wave recording diagram in the process of soft flashing
1.9 Tracking among channels

Tracking among channels is realized through regulator software. The standby
channel tracks the working channel based on the principle that regulation output
(control signal) of the two channels are equivalent. Different from tracking inside a
channel, this tracking can be locked manually.
The automatic tracking ensures stable shift from working channel to standby
channel. This shift may be automatic shift (such as PT phase loss) or manual shift.
No matter double channels allocation or 3-channel allocation is applied in the
system; the standby channel always tracks the working channel.
3-14
2. Functions of the limit

2.1 Limit of force excitation and over excitation
None_Limit
RESET
ForceExc = 0
OverExc = 0
Limit = ForceExcLimit IL > OverLimit

ForceCounter = 0
CoolllingTime < =0 IIT = 0
OVER_LIMIT Force_Limit
ForceExc = 0 ForceExc = 1 @ELSE
@ELSE
OverExc = 1 OverExc = 0 IIT = IIT + IL*IL
CoollingTime -= 1 ForceCounter += 1
ILLimit = OverExcLimit Limit = ForceExcLimit
ILLimit <= OverExc (IIT > IITMax) ||

(FourceCounter > MAXVALUE)
CoolingTime = CoolingTimePreset
FORCE_TO_OVER
ForceExc = 1
OverExc = 0
IlLimit -= 0.1
@ELSE
ILLimit -= 0.1
Diagram 3-7 Control logic of force excitation

Explanation:
OverExcLimit Regulator software setting
ForceExcLimit Regulator software setting
CoolingTimePreset Regulator software setting
ForceTime Regulator software setting
ForceExcLimit anti-time formula: t=(I f-1.1)/(I l-1.1) *Tq
Tq in the above formula is the forcetime. When the excitation current is above the
overExcLimit, the systems begins the ForceExcLimit anti-time counting and timing
and at the same time send the alarm of “ForceExcLimit “ signal, to lock the excitation
increasing operation. In this process, the ForceExcLimit limits the excitation current.
At the arrival of anti-time limit, the excitation current limits through the
OverExcLimit and sends out alarm signals, timing begins, till the cooling time reaches,
another forceExclimit is permitted
3-15
2.2 limit of under excitation

30%
Que lim + 1 Quegd
- Ti S
Q
0
Diagram 3-8 Mode of underExciLimit

The underexcitation limit adopts the curve Quelim=kue*P-Bu, in diagram 3-9. Q
is the actual reactive power value, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates,
and then the output Quegd overlaps to the voltage set valueUgd, the mode being the
incresing excitation mode, limiting the lowering of reactive power.
Explanation:
Kue Slope of the underExciLimit curve Kue Regulator software setting
Bue Deviation of the underExciLimit curve Bue Regulator software setting
Ti Speed regulation of the underExciLimit Ti Regulator software setting
30% Maximum output of underExciLimit 30%
0% Minimum output of underExciLimit 0%
VFgd Regulatory value of underExciLimit, added with the Ugd
The effective condition for underExciLimit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of the
generator is closed and the present reactive power is less than 0. If the conditions are
not met, the underExciLimit is invalid.
When the underExciLimit is at work, the regulator sends “underExciLimit” alarm
signal, locking the decreasing of excitation.
3-16
Diagram 3-9 UnderExciLimit and stator current limit
2.3 Stator current limit

Explanation:
Koe Slope of the stator current limit curve Koe Regulator software setting
Boe Deviation of the stator current limit curve Boe Regulator software setting
Ti Speed regulation of the stator current limit Ti Regulator software setting
30% Maximum output of stator current limit 30%
0% Minimum output stator current limit 0%
Qoegd Positive reactive power output regulatory value,

deduced by the Ugd
The stator current limit adopts the formula Qoelim=Boe-koe*P, in diagram 3-9. Q
3-17
is the actual reactive power value, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates,
and then the output Qoegd overlaps to the voltage set value Ugd, the mode being the
decreasing excitation mode, limiting the amplification of reactive power.
The effective condition for stator current limit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of
the generator is closed and the present reactive power is more than 0. If the
conditions are not met, the stator current limit is invalid.
When the stator current limit is at work, the regulator sends “set A (B) stator current
limit ” alarm signal, locking the increasig of excitation.
2.4 V/F limit

20%
1 VFgd
VFlim
Tvf S
0
Diagram 3-11 Model of V/F limit

Explanation:
Kue Slope of the underexcitation limit curve Kue Regulator software setting
Bue Deviation of the underexcitation limit curve Bue Regulator software setting
Tvf V/F limit regulatory speed Regulator software setting
20% Maximum output of V/F limit 20%
0% Minimum output of V/F limit 0%
VFgd V/F output limit regulatory value, deduced by the Ugd
The V/F limit adopts the formula Vflim=Ug/F(%)-Uglim/100%. Ug is the
actual generator voltage, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates, and then the
output Qoegd overlaps to the voltage set value Ugd, the mode being the decreasing
excitation mode, limiting the amplification of voltage.
The effective condition for stator current limit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of
the generator is closed, starting command is on and Ug>40%, If the conditions are not
met, the stator current limit is invalid.
When the V/F limit is at work, the regulator sends “performance of V/F limit ”
alarm signal, locking the increasig of excitation.
3-18
2.5 Low frequency

47.5
Freq
45.0
Diagram 3-12 Model of low frequency

The premise of the low-frequent action: breaker is OFF in the generator exit,
molecular current <10%, no electric braking signal, and the startup command is ON.
When the premises are met and the generator voltage is less than 45Hz, the
low-frequent action takes place; when the premises are met and the terminal voltage is
more than 47.5 Hz, the low-frequent signals are restored.
After the low-frequent action, the control excitation system inside the regulator
inverts and sends the “low-frequency” alarm signal.
3. Fault detecting
3.1 Synchronization fault
The condictions for fault judgment:
(Utb+15%<Ug)&&R632&&(Utb>20%)
Ug Generator voltage
Utb Synchronization voltage
R632 >40%generator voltage
When the 3 following condictions are met, synchronization fault occurs:
Synchronization voltage is 15% lower than the generator voltage
Generator voltage >40%
Synchronization voltage >20%
If there are 3 consecutive fixed timing regulatory cycles of the above conditions,
synchronization fault occurs.

After the action of the synchronization fault, the regulator sends out fault signals
through the I/O board, and through the communicative interface. The locked
3-19
watchdog signal is sent out, so that the monitoring unit can detect fault in the
regulator and send out the channel shift command.
3.2 Low excitation current

When the channel is under operation, the stator current >10%&&the excitation
current <20% of idle loaded excitation current
When the low excitation fault occurs, the regulator sends out fault signals through
the communicative interface.
3.3 Excitation transformer secondary side CT fault

The channel is working, and (Ug>80%)&&(IL<10%)&& synchronization
coefficient ≠0
When the 3 following condictions are met, excitation transformer secondary sideCT
fault occurs:
Generator voltage >80%
Ecitation current <10%
Synchronization coefficient≠0
3.4 PT fault
Average 0.83Ug
Ug Generator voltage
Ua Generator A-phase voltage
Ub Generator B-phase voltage
Uc Generator C-phase voltage
Utb Synchronization voltage
IL Excitation current
If the synchronization voltage coefficient is adjusted properly, judgement is

made through the synchronization and generator ovltage. If the synchronization
3-20
voltage >20%, generator voltage is 10%lower than synchronization voltage, PT fault

occurs. If the synchronization voltage coefficient is not adjusted properly, judgment
is made on the base of 3-phase voltage and the average voltage. If the generator
voltage is >10%, and any one of the A/B/C phases voltage is 83% smaller than the
generator voltage, PT fault occurs.
When the excitation current is >20% and the generator voltage is <5%, PT fault
occurs.
If there are 3 consecutive fixed timing regulatory cycles of the above conditions,
PT fault occurs, and the system would be changed to the manual mode. If the
condictions are not met, there’s 2 seconds’delay for the restoring of the PT fault. At
the same time, the regulator monitoring units would switch the regulator to the
standby channels.
3.5 regulator fault

Occurs in CPU restoring, programmes running away, DSP error, or in mode testing,
locked state signals sent out, and the generator voltage is >40%.
4. Fault prevention
4.1 Detection fault tolerance
Analogue quantity fault-tolerance and switch quantity fault-tolerance are included,
such as detection of PT disconnection, anti-conglutination of excitation increasing &
decreasing contacts, oil switch signal fault-tolerance etc.
4.2 Control fault tolerance

This includes increase excitation by overexcitation limit operation, decrease
excitation by underexcitation limit operation, anti-noload mis force excitation,
Overexcitation/underexcitation priority judgment, PSS output fault etc.
5. Other functions
5.1 Signals R631
R631 is the rated value signal of the generator voltage >10%. However, in order to
lock the errors in abnormal condictions, the current judgment conditions are added.
3-21
Operation condition: generator voltage>10%&&rotor current >4.5%;

Restoring condition: generator voltage<8%
5.2 signals R632

R632 is the rated value signal of the generator voltage >40%.
Operation condition: terminal voltage>40%
Restoring condition: generator voltage<38%
5.3 Output of starting command

Generating mode:
Performance: R631&&start up command existent
Restore: R631 restore
Electric braking mode:
No output.
Constant control angle mode:
Enforced output or widrawal through regulating software
Short circuit dry mode:
Enforced output or widrawal through regulating software
5.4 Reset
When the startup command disappears, reset operation occurs, including:
a. Automatic switch to automatic mode if PT fault causes the swich to
constant excitation current mode
b. Voltage setting value preset
c. Current set value preset as 0
5.5 channel tacking

Only valid in the generating mode, channel tracking onstate condition:
Channel tracking setup is ON&& R631 signas existent
5.6 Internal tracking

Only valid in the generating mode, the standby operation mode tracks the main
operation mode.
3-22
5.7 Systemetic voltage tracking

Conditions are:
Systematic voltage tracking function onstate, channel operated, systematic voltage
is >80%, the braker at the generator exit is off-state and the stator current is <10%.
5.8 Constant Q control

Effective conditions:
Constant Q function on state, this channel operated, the braker at the generator exit
on state and the stator current is. >10% of the rated value.
Among the stator current limiter, the force-excitation and over-excitation, if any of
the 3 functions oprates, the constant Q control can decrease excitation but cannot
increase excitation.
If the underexcitation or lowecitation current is in operation, the constant Q control
can increase excitation but cannot decrease excitation.
The constant Q control setting value can be set as the rated value through the
communicative setting, and it can also directly employs the current power value.
If there’s excitation increasing and decreasing operation, PQ control rated value is
automatically updated as the current no-load value, that is to say, when the constant Q
is on state, the excitation increasing and decreasing operates on the no-load value
rated value.
Conditions for constant Q function exit: manual operation, the braker at the
generator exit is OFF or constant PF input.
Accuracy: ±1%.
5.9 Constant PF control

Effective conditions:
Constant PF function on state, this channel operated, the braker at the generator exit
on state and the stator current is. >10% of the rated value.
Among the stator current limiter, the force-excitation and over-excitation, if any of
the 3 functions oprates, the constant PF control can decrease excitation but cannot
increase excitation.
3-23
If the under-excitation or low-ecitation current is in operation, the constant PF

control can increase excitation but cannot decrease excitation.
The constant PF control value can be set as the rated value through the
communicative setting, and it can also directly employs the current power value.
If there’s excitation increasing and decreasing operation, PPF control rated value is
automatically updated as the current no-load value.
Conditions for constant PF function exit: manual operation, the braker at the
generator exit or constant Q input.
5.10 Manual operation of excitation increased or decreased

Excitation increasing permitted conditions: no operation of V/F limit, overexcitation
limit, force-excitation limit, and stator current limit.
Excitation decreasing permitted conditions: no operation of under-excitation limit
and low-excitaion current.
Anti-glutinous function:
Both the excitation increasing and decreasing has a 4-second anti-glutinous
function. If a command lasts for more than 4 seconds, the operation is not valid until
the operation is restored.
If both the excitation increasing and decreasing are at normal state, and two are
operating at the same time, the operation is invalid.
3-24
6. Logic flow diagram of the regulator

6.1 flow of start up
3-25
6.2 flow of stop
3-26
6.3 flow of main CPU programme and breaking off
3-27
6.4 flow of DSP sampling programme and breaking off
6.5 flow of channel switching
3-28
6.6 flow of channel tracking
6.7 flow of systematic voltage tracking
3-29
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Human-machine interface
Chapter4 Human-machine interface
1. Regulator HMI...................................................................... 3
1.1 Brief introduction ............................................................. 3
1.2.Systemetic setup for the regulator HML .......................... 3
1.2.1 Communication setup .................................................. 3
1.2.2 Backup setup................................................................ 4
1.2.3 Standby time setup....................................................... 4
1.3 Frame introduction for the regulator HML ...................... 5

1.3.1 Key frame .................................................................... 5
1.3.2 Multi-functional selection frame.................................. 6
1.3.3 Switch quantity monitoring frame ............................... 7
1.3.4 Analogue quantity monitoring frame ......................... 10
1.3.5 Current fault alarm frame .......................................... 11
1.3.6 Fault retrospection frame ........................................... 11
1.3.7 Definition of indicator light frame............................. 12
1.3.8 Operation mode setting frame.................................... 13
1.3.9 Operation mode display frame................................... 17
1.3.10 System setup frame.................................................. 18
1.3.11 Testing frame ........................................................... 19
1.3.12 Frame of flashing..................................................... 20
2. Power controller HMI ........................................................ 21

4-1
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Human-machine Interface
2.1 Brief introduction ........................................................... 21

2.2 Frame introduction for the power controller HMI ......... 22
2.2.1 Key frame .................................................................. 22
2.2.2 System frame ............................................................. 23
2.2.4 Current fault frame .................................................... 28
2.2.5 Fan control ................................................................. 29
3. De-exciter HMI ................................................................... 29

3.1 Brief introduction ........................................................... 29
3.2 frame introduction for the de-exciter HMI..................... 30
3.2.1 Key frame .................................................................. 30
3.2.2 System frame ............................................................. 31
3.2.3 operation frame for de-excitaion switch .................... 35
3.2.4 current fault display frame ......................................... 36
3.2.5 screen saver setup ...................................................... 36
4-2
Human-machine Interface, abbreviated as HMI, is an operational interface between

user and excitation system. In Exc9000, HMI comprises three subsystems.
1. Regulator HMI
2. Recitifer HMI
3. De-exciter HMI
Which have the following characteristics.
Convenient for operator’s patrolling inspection. HMI has the functions of
operation parameter display and operation status display as well as fault
alarm command.
Convenient for operation. The operation components or operation images are
equipped with illustration and anti-disoperation measures.
HMI has relative independence. In case of its fault or invalidity, it will affect
neither normal working of excitation system nor basic operation of excitation
system.
1. Regulator HMI
1.1 Brief introduction
This system employs Profcae touching screen, which has the full screen touching
function, as the human-machine inteface. Its advantage is its funcction sufficiency,
which not only is used for operation, but also for testing and maintanece, with richful
frames, sound visual effect, easy operation and status display for data quantity,
analogue quantity, communicative status and system operation. The status of
equipment operation is shown clearly, so that the operators can master relative
operation in just several minutes.
1.2.Systemetic setup for the regulator HML

1.2.1 Communication setup
Communicative mode: RS232
Digit number: 8
Check bit: even number check, sum check
Stop bit: 1 bit
4-3
Baud rate: 19200
1.2.2 Backup setup

Backup origing address: 202
Backup registor length: 10
Back up content:
Registor address Name
202 Deviation regulation rate set A
203 Deviation regulation rate set B

204 Quantity of recitifier
205 Quantity of temperature measures
206 Quantity of fans

207 Rated excitation current
208,209 Generator rated apparent capacity
210,211 Rated generator voltage

Backup content is not affected by power-fail.
1.2.3 Standby time setup

In order to protect the display screen of HMI, the system has a screen saver, which
temperately disappears when there’s no operation. The default standby tme setup is
2 minutes.
4-4
1.3 Frame introduction for the regulator HML

1.3.1 Key frame
Analogue display:
A) Generator voltage Ug, excitation current, generator active power P, generator
reactive power Q
The above analogue quantity is displayed in the form of percentage and its true value,
in which, the generator voltage Ug’s reference value is the rated generator voltage (V);
the excitation current’s reference value is the rated excitation current (A); the
reference value of generator active power P and generator reactive power Q is the
rated apparent capacity (KVA).
B) Control signal UKA in channel A, control signal UKB in channel B, control
signal UKC in channel C
Switch quantity display:
This shows partial information of the switch quantity in the excitation system.
A) Automatic/manual operation mode
B) Invertion
C) Interconnection
D) Limit
4-5
E) Force-excitation
Each switch quantity has an indicator light of status. When the lights are on, the
corresponding function is on. When the indicator “ automatic” is on, this means the
regulator is in the mode of automatic operation, or it is in the manual mode. When
any of the following is working, the “limit” light is on: “the excitation current limiter”,
“the under-excitation limiter”, “ V/F limit”, “the stator current limiter”.
Click the switch quantity display area, and enter the frame of switch quantity.
Fault alarm
When there’s any fault in the system, there’s a red flashing indicator light. Click the
fault report area, and enter the current fault display frame.
The current fault alarm is listed on a tavle as shown above, according to the
chronological order. The thing happen first is put in the front, and the ensuing put in
the end. Operators can search the old faults in the frame of old fault recording after
the fault is reset.
1.3.2 Multi-functional selection frame

Click the botton “frame selection” in the frame, and enter the multi-functional
selection frame.
4-6
There are a lot of manus for frame selection, with each manu sorresponds to
different functional frames. Click the “key frame “ botton and you can return to the
key frame.
1.3.3 Switch quantity monitoring frame

Click the “switch quantity” manu in the mlti-functional selection frame, and you
can enter the switch quantity display frame. At the bottom of the frame is the selection
manu, with the current selected one being red and others freen. In the middle of the
frame, the frame shows the current cotent under the current manu. As sown below, the
current manu is the switch quantity of Set A, so the display is all information about set
A switch quantity.
1.3.3.1 Frame for Set A/B switch quantity display

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the “switch quantity set A” or
the “switch quantity set B”, and you will enter the frame for Set A/B switch quantity
display. The green light means the operation of corresponding functions.
4-7
1.3.3.2 Frame for system switch quantity

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the “system switch quantity” and
you will enter the frame for system switch quantity display.
This frame mainly shows all the switch quantity information except that of the
switch quantity in Set A/B regulator, including the status information of power
controller and de-excitator.
4-8
1.3.3.3 Frame for excitation system communicative monitoring

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the “communicative monitoring”
manu and you will enter the frame for communicative monitoring.
This image shows the communicative status between different terminalsin the
whole intelligent excitation system. The green lights in front of the terminal is
flashing in normal status, indicating the data exchange between terminals; if
communicative fault occurs, the flashing stops.
4-9
Attention please: this frame just shows the internal communication (the regulator,
recitifier and the de-excitator.)
1.3.4 Analogue quantity monitoring frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “analogue quantity monitoring”
manu, and you can enter the set A/B analogue quantity display.
4-10
On the left of the frame is the display of analogue quantity and the current
percentage, and the analogue quantity real-time curve on the right. The different
quantity is shown in different colors. The data on the left shown in color is the
corresponding amount to the real-time curve on the right. At the bottom of the frame,
one can also choose the data from channel A or channel B.
1.3.5 Current fault alarm frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “current fault alarm” manu, and
you can enter the current fault alarm display.
Should there be any fault in the excitation system, there would be a red flashing
alarm on the display. There are 100 fault or states automatically recorded
chronologically on this frame. People can turn over the pages through the bottom of
“page up/down”.
1.3.6 Fault retrospection frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “historical fault ” manu, and you
can enter the historical fault display.
4-11
If there is the red flashing, that’s the current fault, while if there’s the static blue
light, that’s the historical fault.
Based on the FIFO priciple, the excitation system detailedly records the fault
content, the occurring time, and the resolved time, without being affected by the
power-fail.
1.3.7 Definition of indicator light frame

This frame shows definition of indicator lights on the IO board in the regulator.
4-12
1.3.8 Operation mode setting frame
1.3.8.1 Frame for operation setup

The intelligent touching screen provides most of the function setup of the excitation
system. Functions can be operated through the bottons on the screen. When the
function is working, the color of the bottons are changed, so are the characters on the
bottons.
4-13
1.3.8.2 Frame for deviation regulation setup

On the frame of “operation mode setting” frame, select the “deviation regulation”
manu, and you can enter the frame of deviation regulation.
There are 30 degrees for deviation regulaion rate. When you click the data block, a
data-input block appears, and you can set the regulation rate by selecting data on the
4-14
block. Click “confirm” botton, and see if the feedback value concurs with the set
value.
1.3.8.3 Frame for manual operational mode sutup

On the frame of “operational mode setup” frame, select the “manual operational mode
sutup” manu, and you can enter the frame of manual operational mode.
When powered on, the system defaulted the manual operation mode.
1.3.8.4 Operational frame for PSS entry and withdrawal

The process of this function:
（1）On the frame of “operational mode sutup” frame, select the “PSS operation ”
manu, and you see a window for code input.
4-15
（2）After input of the code (default code 9000), press the key “enter”.
If the code is correct, you will enter the PSS operation frame. Click the PSS entry/PSS
withdrawal botton, the PSS will enter or withdraw.
If the code is incorrect, a warning message for the code error will appear, when the
user can only click the “OK” botton, to return to the parent manu to re-enter the code.
4-16
1.3.9 Operation mode display frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “operation mode display” manu,
and you can enter the operation mode display. This frame shows the current operaion
mode of Set A /B regulator.
4-17
1.3.10 System setup frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “system setup ” manu, after
correctly entering the password (default password 9000), and you can enter the frame
of system setup.
Users should select and enter correctly in this frame, or other errors may appear.
Eg.
If the rated capacity, rated terminal voltage and the rated excitation current is
wrongly entered, consequence is that the actual value of current active power, reactive
power, terminal voltage and excitation voltage will be incorrectly shown too.
(Percentage not affected).
The incorrect input of rated excitation current would affect the result of intelligent
current balancing.
The incorrect setup for quantity of power controller would lead to incorrectness of
power status shown on the HMI.
The incorrectness in entering of quantity for temperature-measures would affect the
temperature shown on the HIM.
Quantity for single cubicle fans , if wrongly entered, would affect the fan operation
4-18
on HIM.
Explanation 1: none of the setup is affected by power-fail.
Explanation2: none of the above setup affects the nomal operation of the system.
Explanation3: if the system is reset, registers are cleared, and the variables should
be reset too.
1.3.11 Testing frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the “testing display” manu, after
correctly entering the password (default password 9000), and you can enter the frame
of testing.
1.3.11.1 Frame for calibration of time and date

On the frame of testing, select the “time calibration” manu, and you can enter the
frame of calibration of time and date. Click the coresponing bottons and you can
enter the current time and date.
1.3.11.2 Frame for relay testing

On the frame of testing, select the “relay testing” manu, and you can enter the
frame of relay testing.
4-19
This function is used to test if the indicator light circuit on the intelligent IO board
is in normal state.
Click the botton of “operation for all relays”. If the functional indicator lights are
on, all the indicator lights on the intelligent IO board are on. Click it again. If the
functional indicator lights are off, the lights on the intelligent IO board are normal.
Click the botton of “ reset for all relays”. If the functional indicator lights are on, all
the indicator lights on the intelligent IO board are off. Click it again. If the functional
indicator lights are off, the lights on the intelligent IO board are normal.
1.3.12 Frame of flashing

Click the botton of “flashing” on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of
flashing
You can select the flashing mode: residual voltage flashing or voltage adding from
0v. Just operate on the corresponding bottons. After selecting the mode, press the
flashing botton for 5 seconds at the bottom of the display, and you can monitor the
voltage change in the process of flashing on top of the frame.
4-20
2. Power controller HMI

In Exc9000 excitation system, a set of intelligent control system is installed in each
recitifier, which comprises intelligent detecting unit, communication interfaces, sensor,
LCD display and corresponding input and output interface circuits etc. Due to
introduction of intelligent control system and disposal of conventional gauges and
indicators, operation, control, status monitoring, information transmission,
information display etc of power controller are intelligentized.
4-21
2.2 Frame introduction for the power controller HMI

2.2.1 Key frame
Analogue quantity display: on this frame, there is display of current in 6 bridge

arms, total current in this power controller, and the wind temperature.
Switch quantity display: the switch quantity shown on this frame: inpulse
input of this controller, fan A/B on and off, fast fuse, resistor capacity error and
input status for current balancing.
Function operation: there are 5 function bottons on this frame, in which F1/F2
are used to operate the fans A/B. Eg. When the function display botton F1
shows “A stop”, click F1, and the operation of fan A stops. At the same time,
botton F1 shows “A start”.
Botton F3 is used to enter the system
Botton F4 is for fault resetting, in the power controller system, “fan power fault
“ is automatic.
Botton F5 is to show flashing of fault. If there is anything wrong with the
power controller system, this botton would flash, and at the same time click it to
enter the fault display, so as to check the problems. If everything is all right in
the power controller, the botton would not flash and the click of it leads to no
operation.
4-22
2.2.2 System frame
Select “sysem” on the key frame, turn on the switch 1 on the power controller
intelligent board, and you will enter the system frame. On this frame, the following
testing items are to be chosen from.
2.2.2.1 Excitation current calibration frame

Select “excitation current calibration “ on the system frame, and enter the excitation
current calibration frame.
In this process, just follow the direction on the screen step by step.
4-23
2.2.2.2 Current balancing calibraton frame

Select “current balancing calibraton “ on the system frame, and enter the current
balancing calibraton frame.
Turn on the switch 1 on the power controller intelligent board, which means the
function of intelligent current balancing is on state. Current balancing calibraton is
valid only after the current balancing is on state.
On this frame, the bottons F2, F3 are for positive bridge are calibraion while F4, F5
are for negative bridge arn calibration.
4-24
2.2.2.3 Selection frame of Hall parts installation direction

Select “selection frame of Hall parts installation direction “ on the system frame,
and enter the following frame.
Way of judgment 1: each Hall part has an “arrow” on the head. If the arrow
direction is the same as the actual current direction, this means “ positive “ installation,
otherwise it is “negative” installation.
Way of judgment 2: face the outlet terminal of Hall parts, if the actual current runs
in from behind of the outlet terminal and out from the outlet terminal, this is the
“positive “ installation.
2.2.2.4 Wind temperature calibration frame

Select “wind temperature calibration 1 “ or “wind temperature calibration 2” on
the system frame, and enter the corresponding frame.
4-25
2.2.2.5 Main fan selection frame

Select “main fan selection “ on the system frame, enter the frame and select the
main fan.
2.2.3 Judgement value setting frame

Press F3 and F4 at the same time, and let go of F4 first, you can enter the
judgement value setting frame.
4-26
2.2.3.1 Wind temperature judgement value setup frame

Select “wind temperature judgement value setup” on the judgement value-setting
frame, and enter it.
You can set the alarm value when the wind temperature is too high (default value
50 degrees) and the return value (default value 45 degrees).
Explanation 1: if set value=reurn value=0, there’s no alarm signal.
Explaaiton 2: if set value<return value, the system employs the last set value and
return value as the default value.
4-27
2.2.3.2 Current judgemnt value setup frame

Select “current judgemnt value setup” on the judgement value-setting frame, and
enter it.
On this frame, you can set the original value of current judgement (default=200A),
bidge arm current set value (default=5A) and the inbalanced current coefficient
(default=0).
Explanation 1: when the initiative condition is set as 0, there is no judgement on
bridge arm 0 flow and current inbalance.
Explanaton 2: when the current inbalance coefficient is 0,there’s no judgement of
current inbalance.
Explanation 3: when the contrller current >the initially set value, Ug>40%, and
bridge arm current <the set value of bridge arn 0 flow, there would be corresponding
signals for brige arm 0 flow.
Attention 4: when the contrller current >the initially set value, Ug>40%, and the
controller current/(3*maximum bridge arm value)<inbalanced current coefficient,
there would be judgement of current inbalance.
2.2.4 Current fault frame

If there’s anything wrong with the power controller system, click the botton “ fault”
on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of current fault display.
4-28
Possible faults testable are: fan A/B power fault, fast fuse, resistance-capacitance
fault, over-tempreture of wind, flow block in the 6 bidge arms, current inbalance and
pulse exit of this controller.
2.2.5 Fan control

Manual switch of fans: operated on the key frame.
Automatic switch of fans: if there is a “ start up” command, or “I1>100A”, the
system would automatically start the fans. If there isn’t a “start up” command or
“I1<50A”, the system would stop all the operation of fans after a certain time delay.
When there’s something wrong with the main fans, the system automatically start the
standby fans and stops the main ones.
2.2.6 Screen saver setup

Screen saver time 2 minutes. When the screen saver is at work, there’s no switch of
frames.
3. De-exciter HMI
In de-exciter, a set of intelligent control system is installed, which comprises same
major hardware with that of power controller, such as intelligent detecting unit, LCD
display and corresponding input etc. Due to introduction of intelligent control system
4-29
and disposal of conventional gauges and indicators, operation, control, status

monitoring, information transmission, information display etc of de-exciter are
intelligentized.
3.2 frame introduction for the de-exciter HMI

3.2.1 Key frame
Analogue quantity display:on the frame of de-excitator, there’s such quantity

display as excitation current, excitation voltage and rotor tempreture, in which the
excitation current and voltage is shown in the form of gauges.
Performance counting: Performance of de-excitation switch and BOD are
monitored and counted with I/O interface. The data will be written into FLASH,
which will not be lost even in case of system power fault.
Switch quantity display: the switch quantity shown on the frame includes:
de-excitation switch, de-excitation switch error, loss of AC and DC, over-voltage
protection.
Function operation: there are 5 operation bottons on the key frame, in which F1
is ued to switch on /off the de-excitater;
F2 is used to clear the over-voltage protection
F3 is of no use here
F4 is used to enter the system
4-30
F5 is to show flashing of fault. If there were anything wrong with the de-excitater,
this botton would flash, and at the same time click it to enter the fault display, so as to
check the problems. If everything is all right in thede-excitater, the botton would not
flash and the click of it leads to no operation.
3.2.2 System frame
Select “sysem” on the key frame, turn on the switch 1 on the de-excitater intelligent
board, and you will enter the system frame. On this frame, the following testing
items are to be chosen from.
3.2.2.1 frame for excitation current calibration

Select “excitation current calibration “ on the system frame, and enter the excitation
current calibration frame.
4-31
3.2.2.2 frame for excitation voltage calibration

Select “excitation voltage calibration “ on the system frame, and enter the
excitation voltage calibration frame.
3.2.2.3 frame for rotor temperature calibration

Select “rotor temperature calibration “ on the system frame, and enter the rotor
temperature calibration frame.
Use the directory keys and +/- keys to input the rotor temperature calibration value.
The designers provide the value.
4-32
3.2.2.4 frame for excitation ammeter range selection

Select “excitation ammeter range selection “ on the system frame, and enter the
excitation ammeter range selection frame.
The ammeter has a range of 5 spans: 1000A, 1500A, 2000A, 3000A, and 4000A.
By the keys of +/-, you can make the choice of the above, which would be shown on
the screen, too.
3.2.2.5 frame for excitation volt gauge range selection

Select “excitation volt range selection “ on the system frame, and enter the
excitation volt range selection frame.
4-33
The volt gauge has a range of 4 spans: 200V, 300V, 500V, and 750V. By the
keys of +/-, you can make the choice of the above, which would be shown on the
screen, too.
3.2.2.6 frame for rotor temperature alarm value setup

Select “rotor temperature alarm value setup “ on the system frame, and enter the
rotor temperature alarm value setup frame.
On this frame, you can set the alarm value (default value=0) and the returned value
(default value=0) when the temperature is too high for the rotor.
Explanation1: when the set value=returned value=0, the LCD just shows the
4-34
temperature without the alarm.

Explanation2: when the set value< the returned value, the system employs the set
value and returned value last time as the default value.
3.2.2.7 frame for rotor temperature output calibration

Select “rotor temperature output calibration“ on the system frame, and enter the
rotor temperature output calibration frame.
Enter the current DA40O voltage. That is to say, the system can transform the
temperature signal into voltage signal, and at the same time, users can get the rotor
temperature signal according to their needs.
The ranges for the rotor temperature output voltage is 0~5 V, with the
corresponding temperature range as 0~260 degrees.
3.2.3 operation frame for de-excitaion switch

Select “operaton” on the key frame, and enter this frame. Key F3 and F4 are used
to switch on and off the de-excitater switch.
4-35
Explanation: interconnection leads to no operation of this frame.
3.2.4 current fault display frame
If there’s anything wrong with the power controller system, click the botton “ fault”
on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of current fault display.
Possible faults testable are: loss of AC, loss of DC power I, loss of DC power II,
overvoltage protection,and wrong location of de-excitater switch.
3.2.5 screen saver setup

Screen saver time 2 minutes. When the screen saver is at work, there’s no switch of
frames.
4-36
User’ manual＿＿＿＿Regulation software
Chapter5 Debug software
1.Introduction......................................................................................2
1.1 Purpose: ....................................................................................2
1.2 Background...............................................................................2
1.3 Characteristics of thesoftware...................................................2
2. Operation environment ..................................................................3
2.1 Hardware...................................................................................3
2.2 Surpporting software ................................................................3
3.Usage .................................................................................................3
3.1 Installation and unloading.........................................................3
3.2 Connected with the regulator....................................................4
3.3 Explanation of the intereface ....................................................5
3.4 System function ........................................................................6
3.5 monitoring of analogue quantity.............................................10
3.6 Monitoring of status quantity..................................................13
3.7 Modifcation of the parametere................................................14
3.8 Command delivery..................................................................23
5-1
1.Introduction
1.1 Purpose:
This book is suited for the engineers who commission and maintain the EXC9000
regulator, mainly introducing the software and hardware requirements, software
functions, system parameter diagram and command list. Through the detailed
information of the functions, the readers will be able to operate correctly the Debug
Software, so that proper debugging and testing will be possible in the process of
production.
1.2 Background
This book is about EXC9000 Debug software version V1.0 , abbreviated as
Debug.Debug is used in the Guangzhou Electric Apparatus Research Institute
Guangzhou Kinte Electric Control Co., Ltd.
1.3 Characteristics of thesoftware

Debug uses the communication interface provided by EXC9000 system, to provide
a visible interface between the users and the regulator, which makes convenience for
users to regulate the parameter and test the excitation system.
Its characteristics:
a) With consummate ondoscope functions. It can simultaneously show 11 lines of
analogue signals, each of which has such functions as independent switch,
color setting, scaling and parellel move. Each analogue channel has the storing
depth of 6500points and 10ms/point distinguishability. The richful wave
memerization helps to store the wave as data file, sigle color wave and colorful
wave BPM files.
b)Parameter manipulation. The software can upload , down load the EXC9000
excitation parameter table. The parameter table can control the version, which
can automatically check the validity of the parameter. Each parameter has a set
of constraint conditions, which can effectively prevent input of wrong
parameters. Division of parameters helps to figure out the particular data
5-2
from large amount of parameter tables. The comparson of parameter helps to

compare the current parameter with the default one and the ones that are stored
in the files. Parameter memery transfer helps to transform the parameter into
data file or text file.
c) Command interface. Users, if using Debug, can easily control the EXC9000
excitation regulator for different operations, including the mode switch, step
testing, set the triggering condition for event recording and oscilloscope.
d)Programmin function update. Matched with the EXC9000 regulator, the software
can download different files to the regulator, to update the regulator software.
e) Written in C++ language, and designed to face the subject, the software raise the
redibility and maintainability.
2. Operation environment
2.1 Hardware
The minimum setup for the system operation:
a) Intel PM processor 1.0G
b) With a disk storage capacity of 16 MB
With an internal storage capacity of 256MB
With a serial communication interface
2.2 Surpporting software

The operation needs the surpporting operation system Win98/2000/XP.
3.Usage
3.1 Installation and unloading
Doule click the program installation icon, and the installation is finished
automatically.
The erection sequence would be stored in C:\Program Files\GZDKS\Debug. There
are in all 6 files:
Debug.exe Main program
Debug.cfg User’s configuration files
5-3
Exc9001.cef Version control files

Exc9001.mdl Mode configuration files
Avr.bmp Avr picture mode
Pss.bmp Pss picture mode
3.2 Connected with the regulator

Regulator connects with the debugging computer through the interface RS232.
The wring terminals are DB9-MALE, adopting the 3-line system, ie. Line No.2, 3 and
5. They connect like this:
If the debugging computer hasn’t got the serial interface, USB/RS232 serial can be
used as the serial expansion. Through the device handler, users can check the name of
the devices. Users choose the corresponding serial No.. In the communication
device of the debug software.
5-4
3.3 Explanation of the intereface
The interface can be devided into:

1) Menu: providing different operation function interface
2) Waveform indicator. : Showing the analogue quantity information, setting
the channel colors, location modification, and time distinguishability
modification.
3) Parameter list: showing the system parameter , through double clicking
a certain parameter or press “enter” after selecting an item, users can
enter the parameter modification interface.
4) Parameter set selection: for the sake of covenient observation, users can
make the parameter list showing just the selected parameter set through
the parameter set selection.
5) Command area: users can select a certain command, and control the
operation of the regulator.
6) Event recording: showing the time of occurrence and restorage of certain
events, with sound alarm.

5-5
7) Status quantity information area: in all 16 of such areas. Each of them can
be set as a certain status quantity among the 48 in the regulator.
3.4 System function

Menu Explanation
Connection Open the serial interface, connected with the regulater. Data
received from the regulator.
Disconnection Close the serial interface. All communication between the
debugging software and regulator invalid.
Command lock In the status of lock, debugging software doesn’t allow users to send
command to the regulator.
Program download Enter the interface of downloading.
Download cancel The command debugger restart, the original program is used. The
downloaded program will be cancelled.
File updated Command debugger stores the downloaded files and perform the
attatched command as well as the downloaded debugging program.
Loading configuration Down Load the personal software configuration information such as
information color, location and so on.
Storing configuration Store users’ personal configuration information
information
Configuration information Store users’ personal configuration information to other files
saved as
Communication setup Set up the serial password for connection with the regulator
Communication status Show the received data quantity and version number of the regulator
Exit Exit the debugging software
Way to download the program:
Click the following menu, a dialog box appears:
5-6
If the debugging program has exited, at the state of receiving, please click “yes”,
otherwise click “no”. Refer to the following instruction to exit the debugging
program.
In the process of debugging, the download function is unavailable. Only when the
programme is not in operation, can there be program download. If users exit the
debugging program and start the receiving function, the switch quantity board DO No.
1 light will be flashing.
Way to exit the debugging program:
1) Make sure the debugging software is interconnected
2) Make sure the debugging software is in the command enable state. If it is
locked, please click “command lock” so as to switch the debugging software
to the enable state
3) Select “30000 debugging operation exit command”, and click Excute.
4) Wait for the No.1 light on the debugging switch quantity board to flash
5) The debugging software program exits.
After users select “yes”, a dialog box appears:
5-7
In the box “ File to download”, fill in the absolute route and the file name, or click
the botton “brows…” to select the file to be down loaded. The program itself would
fill in the absolute route and file name in the box “file to download”.
The commissioning software take the downloaded file as the default regulatory
program, so the target name is “avr.exe”, which makes it not necessary to rename the
file.
Only with the manufacturer’s authorization can the pragramme be updated.
When the ownloading is finished, the regulator is still at the state of receiving, the
debugging software would present a dilogue box inquiring whether to save the file
immediately. If the user chooses “yes”, the regulator saves the file, and exits the
receiving process to execute the regulatory program. If the user chooses “no” , the
regulator is still receiving, enabling the computer to continue downloading. When
the download is finished, the users have to execute the “update file execution” menu
to save the file; or the users can click “cancel” not to save the program.
After the above 2 operation, please wait for the regulator to initiate and load file.
Users have to wait longer if the program is canceling the file downloaded.
Operation Explanation
Reference line Single-Click the small triangle, and the reference line is in
the state of tracking. Move the mouse, and the reference line
is moving according to the mouse. When it reaches the
target place, single-click the mouse again, and the reference
5-8
line stay at the taget place.

X-axis scaling Sigle-click “+” so that the picture can be enlarged along the
X-axis, while sigle-click “-“, the picture can be reduced
along the X-axis.
Range: 64~0.25
X-axis horizontal move The large amount of data requires the slide move to check
the former data recorded. Sigle-click the prismatic area, then
move the mouse, and confirm the location with another
sigle-click.
Channel selection Sigle click the left key of the mouse to choose the channel
label. If chosen, the label would be enclosed in a rectangle
with round angles. The above picture shows that “Ug” has
been selected.
Y-axis pantograph ratio Click “+” or “-“ so that users can change the pantograph
ratio of the Y-axis. Double click the numbers, and a dialogue
box appears in which users can directly input the numbers.
The ratio is shown on the right most end of the curve.
Y-axis scaling reference The triangle on the right of the screen controls the scaling
reference.
Channel display switch Click the rectangle box in front of the channel label and
make the channel hide or appear
Channel color set Double click the left keys of the channel label so as to get
the color selection box; users can set the channel colors.
Power coefficient After the display of enforced power coefficient, T2 in the
display 11th channel is the current power coefficient, which is
counted on the basis of P,Q value
5-9
3.5 monitoring of analogue quantity
Menu Explanation
Open Open the data files, the recorded wave would be shown on the
ondoscope area. The ondoscope is in the state of pause.
Save as bitmap Save the current area as bitmap. Users can set the BMP type and add
comments in the dialogue box.
5-10
Colorful black background

Colorful white background
Monochromatic
Save as data files Save all the data to disks for future reference.
Copy the picture as To copy the content into the internal storage as the referent pictures.
reference picture
Hide/show the reference To switch show and hide of the referent picture.
picture
Switch the location of the To switch location of the reference pictures.
reference picture
(front/back)
5-11
Setup for the swich quantity The corresponding status quantity of the 16 status in the switch
display quantity display area
Pause/continue Refurbish of the wave forms
Pause: ondoscope stops receiving new data and the internal data
remain unchanged
Continue: ondoscope receives new data
Clear the picture Clear all the data in the buffer area of the debugging software. After
this operation, all the data turn to 0 in this buffer area
Data Recording point Record all the new data point buffer area
Point to Show all the data To spring out all the data point recorded in the dialogue box, and
save the ordinary files as well as the Matlab files.
Clear all the points of data Clear all the data points in the buffer area
Show the power coefficient To make and show T2 as the power coefficient based on the PQ
5-12
3.6 Monitoring of status quantity
Users can set the display content of each status quantity here.
5-13
3.7 Modifcation of the parametere
If the paraeter is in the state of lock, when douvle click the parameter list, the
parameter modification dialogue box would not appear. Execute
“parameter”->”parameter lock”, and switch the state of locked and unlocked. When
there’s a “√”in front of “parameter locked” , the modification of parameter is invalid
because the parameter is locked.
When the debugging software is on-line, new parameter will be transported to the
regulator immediately as default value. The regulator will control according to the
new data. When the debugging software is offline, users can modify the parameter but
the parameter could not be sent to the regulator.
Meun Explanation
Open Open the parameter files, read the parameter and refurbish data
Save as Save the data to disk
Upload Read the operational parameter in the regulator
Download Download the data to the regulator, but no written into FLASH, file
5-14
loss if power off

Download Download the data to the regulator, written into FLASH,
default
value
Comparison Compare data in the parameter and that in the disk, show the results
of
parameters
Compares Compare data in the parameter and the defalt value, show the results
with default
parameter
Parameter Swith status of parameter lock. If it is locked, no modification
locked available.
Description Set the escription characters in this parameter, with the content saved
in the parameter fles.
Information Show the description of the parameter
AVR Directly modify parameter in the model illustration
PSS Directly modify parameter in the model illustration
5-15
Parameter list:
In Name Un P Gro Dft Min Max Description
0 Kilo 3 100 0.500 0.250 0.750 No-loaded excitation parameter
1 Kpow 3 100 5.760 0.000 32.00 Power factor
2 Kig 3 100 2.400 0.000 32.00 Stator current parameter
3 Kil 3 100 3.500 0.000 32.00 Excitation current parameter
4 Kug 3 100 2.400 0.000 32.00 Generator voltage parameter
5 Kus 3 100 2.900 0.000 32.00 System voltage parameter
6 Kc 3 100 0.880 0.000 32.00 Adjustment of A/B tracking
7 Kutb 3 100 0.000 0.000 32.00 Synchronization voltage paramenter
8 Kab 3 100 0.000 1.000 32.00 Adjustment of tracking A/B
9 Kv1 0 100 100.0 0.000 1000. Ratio of angle velocity
10 Kv0 3 100 1.000 0.000 2.000 Ratio of noise
11 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
12 4 103 -0.400 -1.000 0.000 P=0,Value of permitted reactive
13 4 103 -0.300 -1.000 0.000 P=25% Value of permitted reactive
16 4 103 0.000 0.000 0.000 P=100% Value of permitted reactive
17 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
0 PSS_ PSS output
18 TSD1 0 101 0.000 0.000 0.000 UK
1 PSS_0 PSS midst variable
5-16

8 V0 Noise
9 V2 Analgoue V2
10 V3 Analgoue V3
11 Us S
12 Utb In-phase voltage
13 Deg Power Angle
14 Freq Angle frequency
15 Ua Set A voltage
16 Ub Set B voltage
17 Uc Set C voltage
18 Ig2 Generator current
19 Uka UKA
20 Ukb UKB
21 Ukc UKC
22 V/F_ Output of V/F limit
Gd
23 ILLim Value of excitation
it current
24 UE_G Output of
d underexcitation limit
25 OQ_G Output of reactive
d power
26 TC_G Output of diversion
5-17
d
27 PID_ PID preset
Gd
28 PSS_ PSS power
V2
29 Ug No equalize testing Ug
30 PSS_ PSS angle velocity
V1
19 TSD2 0 101 0.000 0.000 0.000 The same with TSD1
20 Record 1 0 201 0.000 0.000 0.000 Fixed in Debug, can´t change
PQ
p.u
23 controll 4 101 0.100 -1.000 1.000 Preset value of constant reactive power
.
preset
PPFcontro
24 3 101 0.500 0.200 1.000 Preset value of constant factor PF
ll preset
30000
25 Jump time S 2 101 0.000 0.000
.000
Jump 20.00 10 instead rated generator voltage which
26 2 101 0.000 0.000
value 0 jump variable is 10%Un
27 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
Constant
controll 7600. 860.0 7600.
28 0 101
angle 000 00 000
preset
29 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
30 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
31 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
5-18
32 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000

33 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
30.00
34 T7 S 3 102 6.000 0.000 Integral time constant of power
0
35 T8 S 3 102 0.000 0.000 2.500 Time constant of wave
36 T9 S 3 102 0.100 0.000 2.500 Time constant of wave
37 M 0 102 5.000 2.000 5.000 Times of wave
38 N 0 102 1.000 1.000 4.000 Times of wave
30.00
39 TW1 S 3 102 2.000 0.100 Isolated DC time constant
0
30.00
40 TW2 S 3 102 2.000 0.000 Isolated DC time constant
0
30.00 Door-controlling units and changing time
41 TW3 S 3 102 2.000 0.000
0 constant
30.00 Door-controlling units and changing time
42 TW4 S 3 102 0.000 0.000
0 constant
30.00
43 KS1 3 102 4.000 0.000 PSS plus
0
44 KS2 3 102 0.620 0.000 5.000 Plus coefficient of power Integral calculation
45 KS3 3 102 1.000 0.000 5.000 Signal matching coefficient
46 T1 S 3 102 0.190 0.000 2.500 Beyond time constant
47 T2 S 3 102 0.020 0.000 2.500 Lag time constant
48 T3 S 3 102 0.300 0.000 2.500 Beyond time constant
49 T4 S 3 102 0.030 0.000 2.500 Lag time constant
50 Xe 3 102 0.000 0.000 1.000
51 Xq 3 102 0.700 0.000 1.000
PSS limit p.u
52 4 102 0.050 0.000 0.100
value .
53 PSS p.u 4 102 0.400 0.000 0.900
5-19
in-power .
PSS p.u
54 4 102 0.350 0.000 0.900
out-power .
55 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
0 P Active power
1 Q Reactive power
2 Ug Generator voltage
3 Uk Controlling signal
4 Uk_2 Controlling signal
5 PSS_U PSSoutput
K
56 DAC0Sel 0 101 0.000 0.000 0.000
13 Ugd Preset of voltage
14 Igd Preset of current
15 V[0] Noise signal
16 Square Testing wave
17 PSS_V PSS power
2
18 PSS_V PSSangle volecity
1
57 DAC0K 3 101 0.000 0.000 30.00 DAC0 plus
58 DAC0B 0 101 0.000 0.000 30000 DAC0 offset
59 DAC1Sel 0 101 0.000 0.000 0.000 The same with DAC0SEL
60 DAC1K 3 101 0.000 0.000 30.00 DAC1plus
61 DAC1B 0 101 0.000 0.000 30000 DAC1 offset

5-20
62 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000

63 3 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
64 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
65 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
Soft rising 30.00
66 S 3 103 5.000 0.000 Soft rising timeT30~90
time 0
Mannul
67 setting v/s 3 103 1.000 0.100 2.000
time
Regulatio 10.00 20.00
68 Ms 0 103 5.000 Regulation cycle is 5 or 10
n cycle 0 0
11.00 320.0
69 Kavr 1 2 103 0.000 AVR magnify multiple
0 00
70 TA1 s 3 103 0.000 0.000 2.000 The 1st beyond time constant
71 TA2 s 3 103 0.000 0.000 2.000 The 1st lag time constant 0<TA2<=TA1
72 TA3 s 3 103 1.000 0.000 10.00 The sec beyond time constant
73 TA4 s 3 103 4.000 0.000 30.00 The sec lag time constant
74 Kair 2 103 5.000 0.000 320.0 Magnify multiple of mannul regulation
75 TB1 s 3 103 1.000 0.000 10.00 Beyond time constane of mannul regulation
76 TB2 s 3 103 4.000 0.000 30.00 Lag time constant of mannul regulation
77 Tb s 3 103 0.000 0.000 2.000 Excitation current filter time constant
78 3 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
79 Tc 3 103 15.00 0.100 30.00 Devision time constant
80 Tvf s 3 103 10.00 0.100 30.00 V/F limit time constant
Uder
p.u
81 excitation 4 103 1.100 0.000 1.200 Underexctation limit value
.
value
Force p.u
82 4 103 1.800 0.000 2.200
excitation .
Cooling 100.0 30000 The shortest time between two times
83 s 0 103 1.000
time 00 .000 forceexctation.
V/F limit p.u
84 4 103 1.100 0.000 1.500
voltage .
5-21
30.00
85 Kue 3 103 0.000 0.000 Underexcitation limit value K
0
86 Bue 3 103 0.000 0.000 1.000 Underexcitation limit valueB
32.00 Underexcitation limit and over reactive
87 Ti s 3 103 0.000 0.000
0 power limit speed
32.00
88 Koe 3 103 0.000 0.000 Over reactive power limit value K
0
32.00
89 Boe 3 103 0.000 0.000 Overexcitation limit value B
0
-15.00 15.00
90 Devision 0 103 0.000 TC
0 0
Powerbrak
91 4 103 0.400 0.000 1.000 Stator current preset in electric brake station
epreset
The
biggest 30000
92 s 0 103 0.000 0.000
forceexcit .000
ation time
93 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
94 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
Voltage
95 4 103 1.000 0.050 1.200
preset
96 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000
Filter
97 trigger 0 201 0.000 0.000 0.000 Don’t change place in Debug programe.
condition1
Filter
trigger
98 0 201 0.000 0.000 0.000 Don’t change place in Debug programe.
condition
2
5-22
Filter
trigger
99 0 201 0.000 0.000 0.000 Don’t change place in Debug programe.
condition
3
3.8 Command delivery

Select the command to be executed in the pull list box and click
“execute”, and the command is execued. The software provides 2
identical command list and executing bottons, for the sake of
covenient experiment: selection of 2 different commands and prompt
execution.
No. Name Code Remarks

No.
0 Upload parameter through 101 Read parameter through regulator and
regulator refurbish data
1 0
2 Read parameter from FLASH 103 The regulator reads parameter from FLASH
as the operational parameter as the operational parameter
3 Save the regulator parameter to 104 The regulator saves the current operational
FLASH parameter to FLASH
4~9 0
10 0 loaded 5% negative loaded 210 Phase step testing command
2% phase step F5 Step quantity: 0 loaded=5% interconnected
=2%
Step time: 10seconds
11 0 loaded 10% negative loaded 211 Phase step testing command
5-23
4% phase step F6 Step quantity: 0 loaded=10% interconnected

=5%
Step time: 10seconds
12 20% phase step 200ms F7 212 Phase step testing command
Step quantity: interconnected =20%
Step time: 0.2seconds
13~21 0
22 Automatic mode 303 Regulator switched to automatic mode. If PT
fault occurs, regulator will neglect this
comamnd
23 Manual mode 304 Regulator swithed to manual mode
24 0
25 Normal mode 350 Regulator switched to generating mode. Only
when the switch conditions are met, can the
switch happen, or the regulator will neglect
this command. For detailed information, refer
to the regulator explanation.
26 Constant contol angle mode 351 Regulator switched to Constant contol angle
mode. Only when the switch conditions are
met, can the switch happen, or the regulator
will neglect this command. For detailed
information, refer to the regulator
explanation.
27 Short circuit dry mode 352 Regulator switched to short circuit dry mode.
Only when the switch conditions are met, can
the switch happen, or the regulator will
neglect this command. For detailed
information, refer to the regulator
explanation.
5-24
28 PQ switched on 404 Constant reactive power in operation. The set

value is the current generating reactive power
value.
Remarks: only one of the PQ and PPF control
can be used , the latter use would close the
fomer use.
If conditions are not met for constant Q
control and constant PF control, the regulator
would automatically close the 2 cotrol modes.
29 PQ switched off 405 The reactive power control exits
30 PPF switched on 406 Constant active power in operation. The set
value is the current generating reactive power
value.
Remarks: only one of the PQ and PPF control
can be used; the latter use would close the
fomer use.
If conditions were not met for constant Q
control and constant PF control, the regulator
would automatically close the 2-cotrol modes.
31 PPF switched off 407 The constant active power control exits
32 PQ switched on 408 Constant reactive power control in operation,
set value=P.23 parameter
33 PPF switched on 409 Constant active power control in operation,
set value=P.24 parameter
34 0
35 Set the control angle 420 Only valid in the mode of constant control
angle mode. Set P.28 parametet as the current
control angle
36~39 0
5-25
40 No compensation testing F1 510

41 No compensation testing F1 511
42 Compensation testing F2 520
43 Compensation testing F2 521
44 AVR testing on F4 530
45 AVR testing off F4 531
46 PSS testing on 540
47 PSS testing off 541
48 PSS on 560 PSS force-excitation exit
49 PSS off 561 Serial connected with the PSS switch in the
human-machine interface. Only when both of
the switches are on can the PSS function be
valid
50 Forced startup 601 Valid in the mode of constantn control angle
and shortcircuit dry mode. Able to control the
regulator to uotput the startup command
51 Forced startup exits 602 Forced startup exits
52 0
53 Regulator out of operation 30000 Regulator out of operation. Used when
downloading files, to control status of
operation into the mode of receiving
54~59 0
3.9 Record waves

Menu Explanation
Open Open data files
Save as bitmap Save the current area as bitmap. Users can set the BMP type and add
comments in the dialogue box.
Colorful black background
5-26
Colorful white background

Monochromatic
Save as data files Save all the data to disks for future reference.
Copy the picture as To copy the content into the internal storage as the referent pictures.
reference picture
Hide/show the reference To switch show and hide of the referent picture.
picture
Switch the location of To switch location of the reference pictures.
the reference picture
(front/back)
Check the recoding Check if there’s data in the regulator , if there is , lock the data
wave data
Upload the recordng Upload the data and unlock it
wave data
Clear wave forms Clear al l the data on in the buffer area
Setup for triggering
conditions
Information Show the information of the recording wave, including the triggering
time and cause
3.10 Event
Menu Explanation
Save Save the event content as text files
Upload event record Upload all the event record from the regulaor
Clear event display Clear the content on the event display
Clear event record Clear the event record from the regulator
Sound alarm Upon new event, control the buzzer for alarm
Setup for recording Monitoring the events which are selected
5-27
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Installation guide
Chpter6 installation guide
1. Brief introduction ...........................................................................3

1.1 Safety guide ..............................................................................3
1.2 Acceptance................................................................................3
1.3 Transport of packed machine....................................................4
1.4 Storage ......................................................................................5
1.4.1 Storage conditions.................................................................. 5
1.4.2 Examination during storage period ........................................ 5
1.5 Case opening.............................................................................6

1.5.1 Frame-dismantling of the packing case ................................. 6
1.5.2 Transport of the machine and casing ..................................... 6
2. Installation of casing.......................................................................8
2.1 Brief introduction......................................................................8
2.2 Casing arrangement and locating..............................................8
2.3 Examination..............................................................................9
2.4 Foundation fixing......................................................................9
3. Electric wiring.................................................................................9
3.1 Electric connecting ...................................................................9
3.2Connection of copper bars .......................................................10
3.3 Grounding connection............................................................. 11
4. Sealing............................................................................................ 11
6-1
Users’ Guide＿＿＿＿Installation guide
5.Completion .....................................................................................12
6. Examination ..................................................................................12
7.Special remarks..............................................................................12
8. Repair of paint damage ................................................................13
6-2
1. Brief introduction
This chapter is involved with guide for storage, transport and installation of
excitation system, which has been compiled for qualified installers of electric
equipment. Installers shall be familiar with these documents and prevention rules
against accidents in installation by power plant! Before installation work is begun,
please read the following safety guide carefully!
1.1 Safety guide

During the whole process of installation, commissioning and maintenance relevant
safety guide shall be strictly adhered to. Before any work is started related to the
system, please read the safety guide and contents marked below.
Alarm
• Before any work starts please read carefully relevant power circuit
diagram!
• During installation some temporary power supply may be needed, such as
power for illumination, electric tools etc. Please supply these temporary powers
with particular care!
• Please make sure all powers are off before the work starts! Then measure it
to make sure no voltage exists any more!
• Do not connect any other testing device on the terminal after the excitation
powers on!
• Please be careful when dealing with electronic components as static
discharge may damage the circuit!
1.2 Acceptance
Upon delivery every case shall be examined. Before the cases are opened, check if
there is any damage on exterior of the cases. In case of any damage, the case shall be
opened to examine the machine at the insurance company and the manufacturer’s
presence. The exterior damage shall be immediately noted down in relevant
transportation document! The damage discovered after the case is opened shall be
6-3
reported within a week to the insurance company and the manufacturer!

Important! The manufacturer will not be held responsible if no Damage
Report has been received!
1.3 Transport of packed machine

The machine shall be discharged from the transport vehicle with crane lift, forklift
or forklift truck. When the packing case is discharged, it shall be lifted in the direction
indicated by the arrow. The symbols printed on the packing case are marked in
accordance with relevant national standard. When a forklift is applied to lift and carry
the packing case, its fork shall insert in parallel into the bottom of the packing case.
Please be careful of gravity center of the packing case (with specially marked symbol)
to avoid its collapse.
The packing case cannot be opened until the machine is transported to designated
place.
Figure 1 Transport packing case
Stop serious alarm: to avoid internal damage of the machine, the excitation
equipment should never be put up side down or falnk-side-down in the process of
transportation.
6-4
1.4 Storage
To avoid quality decline and damage of the machine due to improper storage,
relevant prevention measures shall be taken during the whole process from the
moment the machine goes into the warehouse to the moment it goes out of the
warehouse for installation.
1.4.1 Storage conditions

The machine shall be stored indoor with the original packing and be placed on a
platform or a wooden frame.
Storage workers shall exercise strict control and management of the entrance to the
storage place. Fire fighting devices and materials with appropriate models shall be
equipped with the storage warehouse and shall be kept good and useful. The storage
warehouse shall be always kept clean, dry and ventilated. The arrangement in the
warehouse shall be reasonable. Waste and old packing case shall be cleared away!
Small animals or insects shall be kept away from the warehouse lest they should
contaminate or damage the machine. Requirements to environment by storage are as
follows.
z Allowed storage temperature -25 °C to +55 °C
z Relative humidity（no allowed condensation）5 % to 85 %
Stop serious alarm: the excitation equipment contains precision parts, so it should
be stored originately inside the warehouse and placed on the shelf or wooden frame.
Keep it dry. It is not allowed to be put outside. No exposure to rain or submergence in
the rain.
1.4.2 Examination during storage period

To ensure sound environment and quantity, regular examinations shall be made (at
least once in two months). Any minute change shall be noticed and corrected as soon
as possible! The examination shall go in the following aspects.
z Marks
z Covering and sealing
6-5
z Dryness Mechanical damage

z Cleanness
1.5 Case opening

1.5.1 Frame-dismantling of the packing case
Frame of the packing case shall be dismantled in the following procedures.
a) Dismantle top of the packing case
b) Dismantle all inner supporting
c) Dismantle side boards and clear away the sheet film
d) Check if there is any transport damage
Top Back
T94_0168.D
Front Bottom
Side
Figure 2 Case-opening of machine/casing
1.5.2 Transport of the machine and casing

After the case is opened, the machine shall be carried by crane lift or forklift to the
installation site. The machine shall only locate on horizontal ground surface! Ensure
that the machine does not collapse when it is moved. The machine/casing shall be
lifted with fixing ropes from the bottom (see Figure 3) or from the top (See Figure 4).
6-6
The following points shall be adhered to upon lifting the casing from the bottom.
z Tie the ropes from the bottom!
z Size “L”shall be larger than size “M”.

z Ensure that the ropes have enough bearing strength.
T94_0169.DRW
Figure 3 Transport with crane lift

The following points shall be adhered to upon transport with hoisting rings.
z The angle between the rope and the hoisting claw shall not exceed 120°!
z Direct lifting of casing at frame strictly forbidden!
z The casing can only be placed on horizontal ground!
z The hoisting ring may be dismantled after the casing is installed. Screw caps shall
be put into the screw holes and sealed with resin.
Stop serious alarm: to avoid internal damage of the machine, the excitation
equipment should never be put up side down or falnk-side-down in theprocess of
hoisting and transportation.
6-7
T94_0170.DRW
Figure 4 Transport with hoisting ring
2. Installation of casing
Generally speaking, relevant preparation work has been done as required by site
installation before it is dispatched from the plant, including wiring between cabinets,
hole opening on the bottom, sides and top etc. The illumination and channel on
installation site shall be guaranteed. In case of high humidity and wide temperature
variation scope on installation site, condensation is inclined to occur, which, by
heating on installation site, can be avoided.

Installation of casings shall be executed in the following steps.
a) Casing arrangement and locating
b) Examination
c) Fixing of casing
d) Removal of hoisting ring bolts
e) Sealing
2.2 Casing arrangement and locating

Generally speaking, the machines shall be packed separately during transport and
cabinets shall be kept vertical all through the transport process! After the packing case
6-8
is opened as per above instructions, the casings shall be arranged one by one as per
the design allocation plan.
Before installation, check the arranged location, arranged order and direction
of the front and back doors for each casing so as to avoid wrong installation which
would lead to the impossibility to restore the parant line and wiring between casings.
2.3 Examination
After casing arrangement is finished, before fixing, all the doors and cover boards
shall be examined to make sure they can be flexibly opened and closed without
distortion.
2.4 Foundation fixing

V-iron channels shall be embedded on installation surface of the building in power
plant, on which the machine casing shall be fixed by rivet welding.
Casing V-iron channel
Foundation Installation frame

Figure 5 Foundation fixing
The hoisting ring and bolts can be removed and kept at a safe place as soon as
casings have been arranged and fixed reliable on the foundation!
3. Electric wiring
3.1 Electric connecting
The manufacturer has already designed electric wiring inside the excitation
6-9
machine. Upon site installation, after casings have been put in place, the wires shall be
laid and connected to corresponding terminals as per instructions of the plan.
Designing or installation unit, including signal circuit, control circuit and power
circuit etc, shall do the connections between excitation machine and other machines in
the power plant. Upon selection of cable and wire, please make sure the cable is long
enough and know how to lay it. The voltage drop increase will incur increase of
sensitivity to disturbance. The length of cable will also increase sensitivity to
disturbance.
The control cable from and to the control room is usually connected on terminal of
regulator or de-exciter. The minimum cross section of cable is specified in electric
circuit diagram.
The cable clamp or cable code for binding cable shall be installed on the bottom of
the casing to avoid overtensity of cable joints due to pulling strength. The cable clamp
is also used for cable electromagnet screen grounding.
3.2Connection of copper bars

Before connection, the user shall rub the bottoms of copper bars. The joining
surface of copper bars shall be rubbed thoroughly with soft cloth. If the jointing
surface is dirty, detergent (ethanol for example) or soft brush may be used for cleaning.
There shall not be any dirt or grease on the joining surface. An appropriate amount of
grease shall be applied evenly on the joining surface with sponge plastic pad. But the
grease shall be thin. The copper bars shall be immediately connected after that
treatment.
Screws for electric connection in various units shall be screwed down with the
moment of force stipulated as below. However, lubricating grease shall be applied
before this on their jointing parts.
6-10
Connection of copper cable and copper bars is illustrated in detail in the following
figure. Hexagonal screw gasket copper bar hexagonal cap:
Cable joint gasket spring gasket

Figure 6 Cable connections
3.3 Grounding connection

The major grounding copper bars shall be installed on the bottom of cabinet. And
the major grounding cables shall be connected on grounding copper bars with screws.
Figure 7-6 provides a possible design.
T94_0186.drw
Major grounding wiring

Figure 7 Design of major grounding copper bars
4. Sealing
Based on protection grade required by design, gaskets shall be used for
sealing on joining surface of underframe of casing and the foundation.
6-11
Alarm In case of possible intrusion of insects or dirt into the

cabinet, the open foundation shall be sealed after commissioning！
5.Completion
All transport tools shall be taken away, e.g. the wooden supporting in the case if
any.
Any article not in use shall be cleared, such as packing materials or small pieces of
cable in cabinet etc.
The insulation parts shall be rubbed clean with a piece of antistatic cloth. Do not
use any solvent!
6. Examination
z All BUSBAR connection and frame connection shall be examined because they
are disconnected during transport.
z Examine foundation fixing.
z Examine protection level of the machine to make sure it is satisfactory. Special
attention shall be paid to the mainframe and cable inlet on top of casing.
z Also examine the appearance, completeness, marks, foreign substance, and
cleanliness.
z Examine accuracy and completeness of connection and layout of cable, which
shall be done on site.
z To check if the cable is properly grounded at inlet of casing (cable clamp or
sealed pipe.
z To check if all the protection wires are properly and completely connected.
z Close casing door.
7.Special remarks
In case of interruption of installation and wiring work, the following steps shall be
taken to protect the machine against dirt, dampness or foreign substance.
z Close all the doors of casing.
z Cover the casing with plastic film.
6-12
z Execute heating on installation site or power on the heater in cabinet (if already
installed).
in the process of installation, if any damage was detected , contact the

manufacturer as soon as possible, to consult recoverage or supply of related
equipment.
8. Repair of paint damage

Any damage to the paint on machine surface during transport or installation shall be
repaired before commissioning.
Only polyurethane paint can be used to repair the damaged paint surface in that
only this paint ensures tight attachment to the original paint surface.
A fine hairbrush may be used for repairing scrapes or cracks.
In case of large damaged paint area on front door of casing, the whole door shall be
painted again.
6-13
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Testing regulation
Chapter7 Commissioning
1. Brief introduction ................................................................. 2

2. Safety conditions ................................................................... 2
3. Requirements with commissioners...................................... 3
4. Illustration of urgency .......................................................... 3
4.1 Fire ........................................................................................ 3
4.2 Electric shock........................................................................ 4
5. Testing environment. ............................................................ 4

6. Applicable standards and regulations................................. 4
7. Commissioning schemes ....................................................... 5
Appendix 1 “Factory commissioning schemes for the
EXC9000 excitation system”.................................................... 6
Appendix 2 “Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000
excitation system” ................................................................... 39
7-1
This testing regulation gives detailed site and ex-factory commissioning approaches,
steps and relevant safety guide in EXC9000 excitation system. This testing regulation
is mainly compiled for plant maintenance staff at power plant, which is required to
have good knowledge of electric engineering and professional knowledge closely
related to excitation system.
2. Safety conditions
Dangerous Take special care upon working in the control cabinet . Contact with
any electriferous part in the system may incur serious hurt. An operator is
forbidden to get into the cabinet unless he has necessary professional knowledge
and has taken protection measures
Alarm The AC side of rectifier cabinet components is connected to the

secondary side of excitation transformer and its DC side is connected to rotor
winding of generator. Both have very high voltage, which will result in an enormous
short circuit current. So isolation measures shall be taken with these components to
avoid accidental electric shock. It is strongly recommended that maintenance should
not be done in case of electrification.
Alarm Due to the reason that secondary side voltage of excitation transformer and
excitation voltage are in circuit with excitation cabinet, danger thus exists which
will, in case of an accident, result in an enormous short circuit current.
Alarm In de-exciter cabinet, field switch and de-exciter equipment are in direct
circuit with generator rotors, so potential dangerous voltage may occur any time.
Both door of de-exciter shall be locked to avoid any intrusion into it. If the doors are
opened, please remember: this may result in a high voltage and an enormous short
7-2
circuit current.
The excitation system shall work in a well protect environment. Operators shall
comply strictly with relevant national safety regulations to avoid the following
consequences.
Personal injury and machine damage may be incurred if the safety regulations are
not adhered to.
If commissioning is not done as per requirements or only part of it has been done as
required, damage may occur, which will result in very high repair and maintenance
cost. If there are dust and dirt on the rectifier, a very high discharge voltage may occur,
which is very dangerous.
3. Requirements with commissioners

z Commissioners shall be familiar with excitation system user guide and
“functions”
z Familiar with this chapter
z Familiar with control components, working and alarm display of excitation
system as well as excitation machine local control and main control room remote
control operation (see User Guide).
z Familiar with procedures of operation, commissioning, maintenance and repair.
z Clear about various commands regarding power wiring, structure, theories etc of
excitation system, power-off measures in case of urgency and how to switch off
voltage of the machine in accident.
z Familiar with prevention measures against working site accident. Be able to cope
with urgency after training. Clear about firefighting procedures.
4. Illustration of urgency
4.1 Fire
Notice Everyone shall know the whereabouts of fire-distinguisher and
the urgency exit.
There are helogen, CO2 or foam in fire extinguishers.

7-3
CO2 fire extinguishers are mainly used for fire fighting upon electric apparatus
installation, which cannot be applied to human bodies.
The foam fire extinguisher is quite efficient to fight of ordinary articles, which
cannot be used for electric apparatus but can be used for human bodies.
In case of fire in the machine, firstly the excitation shall be switched off on site or
in the control room. The machine shall be powered off if necessary (See User Guide).
Then switch off the machine power.
Only CO2 fire extinguisher can be used for electriferous cabinet. Foam fire
extinguisher or water is strictly forbidden!
4.2 Electric shock

1．First excitation shall be switched off on site or in the control room. The
machine shall be powered off if necessary. (See User Guide). And then all
powers in the machine shall be switched off.
2． The wounded person shall be rescued from danger and be made to lie low
on the ground. Consider regulation concerning electric shock treatment, then
exercise orderly treatment and call for aid.
5. Testing environment.
1. Height above sea level does not exceed 2,000m.
2. Surrounding air temperature is maximum +40℃ and minimum -10℃.
3. Regarding relative humidity of air, average maximum relative humidity is 90% and
average minimum temperature is +25℃ in the wettest month.
4. A clean environment without explosion danger. There is no gas or electric
conducting dust in the air, which can erode metals or damage insulation. No big
vibration or bumping.
6. Applicable standards and regulations

GB/T7409.3-1997 Large & Medium-scale Synchronous Generator Excitation
System Technical Requirements
DL/T650-1998 Large-scale Steam Generator Static Self & Shunt Excitation System
7-4
Technical Requirements
DL/T583-1995 Large & Medium-scale Hydrogenerator Static Rectifying Excitation
System & Equipment Technical Requirements
System & Equipment Testing Regulations
System & Equipment Installation & Acceptance Regulations
System & Equipment Working & Overhauling Regulations
7. Commissioning schemes
z Factory commissioning schemes
Refer to Appendix 1 “Factory commissioning schemes for the EXC9000 excitation
system”
z Site commissioning schemes
Refer to Appendix 2 “Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000 excitation
system”.
7-5
Appendix 1 “Factory commissioning schemes for the

EXC9000 excitation system”
I. The necessary conditions for commissioning
The folloewing are necessary preparation work before the factory-commissioning
scheme begins.
z Make sure that the inastallation wire and the assembly cabenit are set, the
parent current between cabinets and wires transverse-cabinet cables, internal
data wires and pulse wires are all connected.
Attention: for the ordinary power cabinet system, the plain cables at the side of
cross-cabinet No. 22~24 should be cut off.
z Make sure the double check of the wiring work, that all the model numbers
and design proposal are compatible and that all the component installation
and wirings meet the requirment of the diagrams

Attention: focus on wiring in the main circuit, de-excitation circuit and the exctation
power circuit.
z Make sure all the installation process compatible with the standard, and the
test for insulation and pressure endurance finished
z Make sure that all the program chips are proper;y set inside the different
electric board
z Lay all the cables wires connecting the testing machines and the excitation
cabinet, and check according to the diagram of wiring, including the voltage
sensors, current sensors and circuit protection. Make sure all of them are
correctly and firmly connected.
z Prepare well the instruments for testing, including: ondoscope, universal
meter, commissioning computers, programmer, thermoscope, professional
screwdriver and so on.
z Prepare a blank sheet of ex-factory testing report.
II. Parameter for machine unit and the excitataion system

7-6
No. Items Content Units

1 Name of the power plant
2 Unit No.
3 Rated capacity MW
4 Coefficient of rated power
5 Rated Voltage for stators V
6 Reted excitation voltage V
7 Rated excitation current A
8 Rated idle-loaded excitation current A
9 Terminal PT changing ratio
10 Terminal CT changing ratio
11 Exitaton change capacity KVA
12 Excitation change ratio
13 Excitation change secondary side CT
changing ratio
14 Current devider changing retio
15 Quantity of the power cubicles
Purpose: to make sure the parameter in the power machine and the excitaion system
agreeable with the design, so as to guarantee the accuracy of parameters the next step.
III. The power circuit check

Before excitation charged for the very first time, all the DC/AC circuit switches
should be turned off. Pull out the panels inside the controller of reguler A and B.
Powe off the HIM, IIU, LOU, analogue quantity board, switch quantity board, power
controller intelligent board, power impulse board, de-excitater intelligent board, and
the de-excitater transducer.
Make sure checked:
Purpose: before charged for the first time, there’s no way in which to check if
everything is correct in the process of internal wiring of the power circuit in order to
prevent damage caused by incorrect wiring, the above step should be taken.
7-7
Before excitation charged for the very first time, check the correctness of input
voltage relavent to AC circuit switch. After making sure that there’s no short circuit
for output power inside the excitater, turn on these operation switched.
Purpose: there is DC current voltage grades such as DC220V, DC110V, DC48V, and
DC24V in the excitation system, and AC voltage grades of AC400V, AC220V, ect.
Make sure the concordence of voltage of internal excitation components and the
contol power voltage, or the components will be damaged.
When checking if there’s short cicuit at the internal power output terminal, please also
check if this power will cause short circuit to other powers, eg.whether DC220V will
cause short circuit to DC24V.
Check the voltage and polarity correctness on the 24V power on HMI, IIU, LOU,
switch quantity board, power controller cubycle intelligent board, power impulse
board, de-excitater intelligent board and the de-excitater transducer.
Make sure checked:
Check the +5v, +12v and –12v power terminal on the backboard, analogue quantity
board, and switch quantity board voltage and its correctness in the controller.
Make sure checked:
Make sure all the above is checked, and restore the boards and sockets, ordinary
charge.
When the regulat or is nomally on charge, adjust the 5v power-wiring terminal at
5v in the regulater A and B backboard.
Make sure adjusted:
Adjust the potential device W2 on the switch quantity board, to make the voltage in
the CK2 on this board 4.75v.
Make sure adjusted:
Purpose: the potential device W2 is used in judging the refernt level in the power fault
in the cicro-regulator. When the 5v power regulator in the microcomputer channel is
lower than the above set value, the regulator would send out alarm signals “fault for
mcrocomputer power error” and switch to the standby channels.
Check if the voltage transformer matches the voltage in excitation change
7-8
secondary side.
Make sure checked:
Purpose: the excitation generator machine units are based on the in-phase voltage
transformer parameter set and its corresponding input, so in commissioning operators
should double check the secondary side voltage matching with the primary side
voltage.
Record data according to the following table:
U AC (380V ± 15%) U BC (380V ± 15%) U AC (380V ± 15%)
Ex-factory power I
Ex-factory power II
DC 24DC power Regulator power

Items
power For AC For DC Channel A Channel B
Designed
value
Actual
value
Attention: the voltage of the switch power can be measured at its external terminal.
Attention: in the test of the AC 24VDC, as the secondary side voltage in the regulator
units is lower than the actual value; it is necessary to wire from AC380V factory to
the primary side of the power voltage transformer (special alarm: the grade of the
connected wire should be matched with AC380V voltage.) and then check if the
current circuit is at normal state.
IV. Loading process
1 Check the jumper code
1.1 Intelligent system

The switch quantity board JP1 off, JP2 and JP3 short connected.
Attention: JP3 in the pumping power accumulation systemshould be off.
7-9
The diling switch keys 3 and 4 on the intelligent board should be diled according to
the address (power controller 1# is 00, 2# is 01, 3# is 10, 4# is 11).
The CAN BUS terminal electric resistor at both ends on (generally short circuit the
I/O board and the LK1 on the de-excitater intelligent board, but please check if the
terminal resistor is on at the regulator controller terminal. With the resistors at both
ends on, the resistor of CANBUS is 60Ω when there’s no power. )
Make sure the above operation finished:
1.2 Conventional rectifier system

The switch quantity board JP1, JP2 off, and JP3 short connected.
The diling switch keys 1 and 2 on the intelligent board should be diled according to
the quantity of the power controllers (for 1 power controller 00, for two 10, for three
01, for four 11.).
JP3 on the pulse power releasing board should be short connected.
CAN BUS resistors on at both ends. (Generally short circuit the I/O board and the
LK1 on the de-excitater intelligent board, but please check if the terminal resistor is
on at the regulator controller terminal. With the resistors at both ends on, the resistor
of CANBUS is 60Ω when there’s no power. )
2. Attention in the filling process

Load the effective version of regulator program and single-chip machine program
orderly with microcomputer.
Attention: before downloading the program, get off the corresponding jumper code
(K board means the power controller intelligent board, the de-excitator board or the
intelligent board: JP1, I board means the IIU board:JP2, J board means the LOU
board: JP1), or the programme cannot be downloaded. After the downloading, turn
on the above jumper codes, so as to make the anti-interruption measure effective.
V. Calibration testing
7-10
1. Terminal 1PT, 2 PT and system 3PT voltage calibration

The 3 lines of the PT voltage are supplied by the programmable power. When the
input voltage is the rated value, regulate the voltage coefficient ID [4] at the machine
terminal, so as to make the displayed value at the terminal 100.00%; regulate the
system voltage tracking regulatory coefficient ID [5], so as to make the displayed
value on the system voltage 100.00%; record data according to the following table.
Record for set A voltage calbration:
Input Input Display value Display value Terminal System voltage
voltage voltage of terminal of system voltage tracking regulatory
voltage voltage coefficient coefficient
(%) (V) (%) (%) (Kug) (Kus)
50%
100%
120%
Record for set B voltage calbration:
Input Input Display value Display value Terminal System voltage
voltage voltage of terminal of system voltage tracking regulatory
voltage voltage coefficient coefficient
(%) (V) (%) (%) (Kug) (Kus)
50%
100%
120%
2. Generator current calibration

Simulate CT secondary current with the programmable power supply. When the input
voltage is the rated value, regulate the generator current coefficient ID [2], so as to
make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the following table
after regulation.
Record for generator current calibrtion:
7-11
Input Input Display value Display value A generator B generator

current current of A current of B current current current
(%) (V) (%) (%) coefficient coefficient
(Kig) (Kig)
50%
100%
120%
3. Generator power calibration

Simulate CT and PT with the programmable power supply. In the condition of
voltge reference value and current reference value, regulate the power coefficient ID
[1], so as to make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the
following table after regulation.
Set A power coefficient Kpow:
Set B power coefficient Kpow:
PT=100.00%, Φ=0°
CT current Set A active Set A reactive Set B active Set B reactve
(A) power (%) power (%) power (%) power (%)
PT=100.00%, Φ=90°
PT=100.00%, Φ=-90°
7-12

PT=100.00%, Φ=rated power coefficient angle

4. Excitation current calibration

Simulate CT secondary current with the programmable power supply. When the
input currnt is the rated value, regulate the generator current coefficient ID [3], so as
to make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the following
table after regulation.
Excitation current calibration record the reduced parameter for input current rated
value=0.816*Iln/1.1
Input Input Display Display A excitation B excitation

current current value of A value of B current current
(%) (A) current current coefficient coefficient
(%) (%) (Kil) (Kil)
50%
100%
120%
200%
Attention: errors exit with this measure, in actual grand current testing, please
recalibrate according to the actual current value.
Purpose: the above test is mainly used to examine whether the analogue quantity
7-13
signal sampling and function-transmission is working well. In the process of

calibration, operators need to simultaneously input rated voltage signal to the terminal
PT, otherwise the current calibration may suffer larger errors.
5. Preset of the exctation regulatory range at C channel

Add in-phase voltage signals.
According to the measures for excitation current calibration, add 100% rated
current, and regulate the potential device at W4 on the analogue quantity board to
make the voltage at the testing point CK1 at the right corner on the board 6.8v.
Make sure adjusted:
Purpose: the above step is the reference value forcurrent feedback signal calibration
in C channel regulator, from which operators can set the measuring range.
5.1) Check Toplimit for excitation current in C channel
Switch to channel C, increase excitation until the limit light in C channel is on.
Regulate the current to make the control signals in channel C 50%; the current value
of excitation current is the toplimit, about 120% of the rated excitation current.
Make sure adjusted:
5.2) Check lowlimit for excitation current in C channel
Switch to channel C, reduce excitation until the limit light in C channel is on.
Regulate the current to make the control signals in channel C 50%; the current value
of excitation current is the lowlimit.
Make sure adjusted:
6. Preset of the 110% voltage restraint at C channel

According to the calibration method at terminal PT, add 110% terminal voltage vale,
and switch on channel C. regulate the potential device W2 at channel C on the
analogue quantity board so as to make the display value at channel C about 50%.
Make sure adjusted:
7. Measure of R631, R639 signal value and 10%, 40% voltage

7.1) R631 on analogu quantity BUS signal value
Without excitation current
7-14
R631 signal action value:

R631 signal feedback value:
Attention: in the action of R631, No.6 signal output indicatory light would be on on
the micro compter regulator I/O board.
7.2) Record the corresponding actual value of R632 signal
Action value: Upt=
Feedback value: Upt=
Attention: in the action of R632, No.7 signal output indicatory light would be on on
the micro compter regulator I/O board.
7.3) Regulate overexcitation protection
R639 Signal Action value:
R639 Signal Feedback value:
Over-excitation protection fold:
After the over-excitation protection action, please check the correctness of the
output signals.
Make sure checked:
Attention: when the signal R639 is at work, the relay K04 inside the excitation
regulator would work, and at the same time the regulator screen and I/O board would
give telative signals.
VI. Operation circuit and signal circuit check
1. Excitation initiation operation

Handy manual: Results :
Automatic initiation: Results :
Attention: to see if the initiation is at normal state, operator can judge from the action
of the initiation contactor. Once the contactor is switched on, keep this state unless the
startup time is up or operator closes the initiation manually.
If the residual voltage initiation is not on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation
witout successfully establishing the voltage, the initiation would automatically stop
and sends out signals “initiation failure”.
7-15
If the residual voltage initiation is on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation witout
successfully establishing the voltage, the auxiliary power supply would be
automatically put into use. 5 seconds later, the initiation stops automatically and sends
out signals “ initiation failure”.
Results:
Flashing polarity Results :
2. Fan operation
Manually switch on and off the fans. Normal operation:
Attention: intelligent power controller system operats the fan switch on the display
screen, while the conventional power controller system has a manual switch inside it.
Automatically switch on and off the fans. Normal operation:
Attention: if the startup command R651 is effective, the fans would be turned
automatically.
Automatic switch of fan Normal operation:
In the AC current line 1, fan’s direction check Results:
Power plant switch Results:
Fan operational status signal indicator Normal display:
Attention: when the power conroller applies the A /B two fans, the direction and
status indicator of both fans should be checked.
3. De-excitater operation
Handy manual switch on and off the brake Normal operation:
Remote operational switch on and off the brake Normal operation:
Accident and invertion failure brake Normal operation:
Line I breke circuit Normal operation:
Line II brake circuit Normal operation:
Attention: both of the circuits in the ABB de-excitater switch should be checked.
De-excitator switch status signal indicator Normal display:
4. Check of illumination and heater results:

7-16
5. Check of external input signals

Order External input signals Display on DI lights on the I/O board
the screen
1 Increase-excitation -- DI.1
2 Reduce-excitation -- DI.2
3 PSS locked When PSS is at work,DI.5
light is on, and then the
lock signal is input and the
light DI.5 is off.
4 Brake of Circuit breaker DI.6
at the exit of the genertor
5 Startup command DI.9
6 Stop command DI.10
6. Abnormal phenomen test im set A and B power voltage

Regulate the output +5v power voltage in the regulator A and B respectively,
similate the situation of the abnormal low or high voltage. When it reaches to the low
limit (about 4.75v) or the high limit (about 5.25v), signal “ power error of reglator A
or B” would be sent out, and switched to the standby channel.
Set A regulator power +5v voltage monitoring low limit: v
Set A regulator power +5v voltage monitoring high limit: v
Set B regulator power -5v voltage monitoring low limit: v
Set B regulator power +5v voltage monitoring high limit: v
After the above test, set the voltage at the wiring terminal to 5.00v.
Attention: rgulate the potential device on the micro computer switch in chaneel A and
B, which can help to regulate the power output on the regulator. When it reaches the
high limit , remember not to set the power voltage at more than 5.5v , otherwise it
might damage the components inside the regulator.
7. Check of excitation output signal
7-17
Order Items for test Signals at contact Signals on display

No. point without power and the panel
1 Channel A operation
2 Channel B operation
3 Channel C operation
4 Channel B standby
5 Channel C standby
6 Constant IL regulation
7 Aotomatic mode
8 PSS input
9 PSS lock
10 DC Power setction I off
11 DC Power setction II off
12 AC power off
13 Switch on de-excitater switch
14 Switch off de-excitater switch
15 Switch off de-excitater switch
by mistake
16 Introduce de-excitater
auxiliary switch point
17 1#power controller fast fuse
18 2#power controller fast fuse
19 Fault of 1#power controller
resistor capacity
20 Fault of 2#power controller
resistor capacity
21 Fan power fault of 1#power
controller
22 Fan power fault of 2#power
7-18
controller
23 Error or exit of 1# power
controller
24 Error or exit of 2# power
controller
25 Set A power fault
26 Set B power fault
27 24V power fault
28 Communication fault
29 Initiation failure
30 Over-excitation protection
31 Over-excitation exit
Attention: according to the semand of users, the signals at contact point without
power may not be totally identiacal to the above signals. The acutual value should be
checked according to the special diagram.
8. Check of excitaion communication

Test the communication function of the excitation system by the BitBoy Software
and RS485/RS232. Make sure checked:
Attention: the outlet serial communication interface of the EXC9000 excitation
system if RS485 interface. In the commissioning, the operaters need to do the test by
the RS485/RS232 communication exchange mode.
VII. Open-loop testing

The testing machine units are testing the open loop of excitation device when the
electricity is reversely supplied.
Wiring way: from the low voltage terminal PT side, operators introduce a wire to
the wiring terminal inside the excitation cubicle, at which the 1PT and 2PT are
parrelel connected. Introduce wire from the excitation change secondary side in the
testing machine unit to the anode side of the excitater rectifier bridge, switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, switch on the
7-19
interconnected circuit breaker, and send electricity in reversed direction, so as to

electricize the PT terminal and the excitation voltage transformer. Put a resistance
wire into the rectifier bridge in place of a rotor as the load for commissioning.
1. Preset value
Channel A preset Channel Bpreset Channel C preset
Attention: when the “0 voltage initiation “ is operable, the preset value of Channel A
and B IS 10%, while it is not operable, the preset value is 97%. When the preset is at
normal state in channel C, the preset value is the low limit of its current regulation.
2. Check the automatic channel characteristics

Without changing the preset value, the control signal in channel A and B should rise
as the PT voltage rises, and should decrease as the PT voltage decreases. The
feedback signals in Channel C are the excitation current, which remains unchanged
even the PT changes.
Without changing PT voltage, in excitation increase, control signals decrease, and
αangle shrinkd; in excitation decrease, control signals increase and αangle swell.
Results:
Attention: because there’s the function to prevent excitation increase or decrease
points from sticking to each other, in operation of excitation increase or decrease, the
time for conneting should not exeed 4 seconds, or the command is ineffective.
3. Check the rectifier bridge wave form

Located in channel A and B, used to check the waveforms from each rectifier
bridge, with continual alteration and without mutation.
Results:
Attention: when there are more than 2 rectifier bridges in the system, separate check
for each rectifier bridge is necessary. At the same time, cut the AC current input or
triggering pulse in the rest of the rectifiers.
4. Check test for channel C
7-20
Short connected the JP1 on analogue quantity board by jumper code, switch to
channel C, and observe the waveforms from the rectifier. The operation of exctation
increase or decrease should be able to symmetrize the waves and should be
continually adjustable.
Results:
After the test, get the PJ1 out. Make sure this done:
5. Phase-change characteristics check

Check compatibility between the set control angle in channel A and B and the
control signals. The ranges for UKX are 860~7600, the corresponding UK should be
10.6%~103.7%, linear.
UKX 860 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7600
UK refernce
value
Set A UK
Set B UK
Attention: in the procedure of the test, use the commissioning compter to set the
channel as the constant angle mode, after input the set UKX, record the UK value on
the regulator screen. (When Channel A is working, record UKA; When Channel B is
working, record UKB,) the standard for judgement: in the space interval of
UKX=4000~5000, the UK error should not exceed 3%.
6. Voltage display calibration in de-excitator

DC output Transformer LCD voltage LCD display LCD display Voltage gauge
voltage output display B value V value ranges
Attention: as to the intelligent power controller system, it is necessary to do the

coltage calibration on the screen of de-excitator. For measures of calibrtion, refer to
the indication on the screen. As to the conventional power controller system, there’s
no need of calibration, but operaters need to check if the output of transformer is at
7-21
normal state.
7. Failure test for inversion failure

In the situation of reversed electricity supply, please set the “rectifier/reversion”
switch at the post of “reversion” or the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after
receiving the command, the PT voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the
de-excitater switch is turned on by the relay protector caused by reversion failure and
check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
8. Test for impulse circuit

Power controller withdraw switch “on” for the cubicle withdrawal, and “off” for its
onstate. Observe the LCD, impulse indicator lights on power controller pulse board
and the output waveforms in the rectifier bridge, to make sure the function of the
switch is at normal state.
Results:
Attention: when there’s only one power controller, there’s no switch for pulse cut.
9. Divided de-excitation switch cut impulse check

Divide de-excitation switch, to ensure no impulse output. Results:
10. BOD switch off function check after over-voltage protection

Similate over-voltage protection by means of condenser discharged. Observe the
DC voltage output, and check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
Attention: the standard for the condensers can be 50V/1000uf, directly charged from
the 24v power circuit in the excitation system. The charging time is generally less
than 5 seconds. In the process of discharging, directly put the condenser on the
mutual-inducer in the de-excitation resistor. As to the linear resistor de-excitation
circuit, this step can be skipped.
11. In-phase voltage circuit check

Through testing the DC current in the in-phase primary, secondary voltage and the
7-22
diode rectifier voltage or QF01, operators can judge the correctness of this circuit wire.
The in-phase voltage transformer 3-phase voltage is basically the same. The input DC
voltage for the QF01 operational switch should be 1.4 fold larger than the in-phase
change secondary volt 220v voltage. (If there are 2 steps changing at the same time,
fill in the following table.)
Sandard value Actual value
In-phase changing primary volt
In-phase changing secondary volt
Rectifer volt
12. Fan power voltage transformer circuit check

Measure the primary and secondary volt voltage of the fan power, and fill in the
results.
Standard value Actual value
Fan power primary volt
Fan power secondary volt
Changing ratio
Check the 90%Ug fan power. Results:
Attention: (1)when the test could not provide the rated power of the fan power
voltge transformer primary volt, operaters can add AC 380v power plant power supply
to the transformer primary volt to get the voltage on the secondary volt, and judge if
the transformer is at normal state. (2) when the voltage at the generater terminal is less
than 90% of the rated vale, the power transformer circuit is out of work, or the low
voltage in the fan may damage the fan. (3) when there is no fan power voltage
transformer , this step can be skipped.
13. Record for excitation system output signals

Order No. Items for test Contact signal Screen signal
without power
1 Pulse error
7-23
2 In-phase phase cut

3 Reversion failure
4 Over-voltage protection
VIII. Unloaded close loop testing

parrelel connected. Introduce wire from the excitation change secondary side in the
testing machine unit to the anode side of the excitater rectifier bridge, switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, switch on the
interconnected circuit breaker, connect the excitation voltage transformer and the
generator terminal. Switch on the rotor circuit breaker in the testing machine unit, and
connect the rotor with the de-excitator wsitch output terminal. Turn on the generator
to make it spin at rated speed.
1. Raise voltage from 0

Choose the mode of “increase voltage” in channel A or channel B. initiation should
be able to establish 10% terminal voltage.
Results:
After this voltage increase in order, continue the operation of excitation increase
until the terminal voltage reaches 100%. In this process, operators can see the steady
increase of voltage through the commissioning software, without vibration.
Results:
Check residual voltage excitation function. Results:
Attention: if the lab cannot meet the requiry of “voltage increase from 0” or
“residual voltage initiation” tests, the above test could be done on site test.
2. Initiation at preset value

Initiate respectively in the “normal” state in channels A, B and C. Each of them can
establish terminal voltage at the preset value.
Channel A PT voltage:
7-24
Channel B PT voltage:
Channel C PT voltage:
Attention: the preset value of channel C is the loe limit of the excitation current in
channel C, generally speaking, after voltage increase, the terminal voltage is
10%~20% of the rated value.
3. Regulating ranges
Channel Regulating range Standard value Results
A Terminal voltage high limit: High limit: 110% rated voltage
Low limit: Low limit: 70% rated value
B Terminal voltage high limit: High limit: 110% rated voltage
C Excitation voltage or current High limit: 110% rated excitaion
High limit: voltage
Low limit: Low limit: 10%~20% 0-loaded
excitation voltage
4. Regulation of channel tracking accuracy and switch
4.1) Accuracy regulation when channel C tracks channel B

Regulate W3 potential device on the analogue quantity board to prevent
interruption when channel B is switched tochannel C.
Make sure done:
4.2) Accuracy regulation when channel B tracks channel C
After channel C tracks channel B, channel B is at work, after the channel C tracking
is finished (LDD, LID flashes alternately), modify parameter ID [6](ie.
Kc=Kc*UKB/UKC), so as to prevent interruption in the generator termianl when
channel C is switched to Channel B. otherwise remodify the ID [6] in channel B.
Set B Kc:
4.3) Accuracy regulation when channel A tracks channel C

7-25
After channel C tracks channel B, channel A is at work, after the channel C tracking
is finished (LDD, LID flashes alternately), modify parameter ID [6](ie.
Kc=Kc*UKA/UKC), so as to prevent interruption in the generator termianl when
channel C is switched to Channel A. otherwise remodify the ID [6] in channel A
Set A Kc:
4.4) Accuracy regulation of A/B channel tracking

Regulate parameter ID [8](ie. Kab), to prevent interruption when the 2channels of
A and B is switched one another.
Set A Kab:
Set B Kab:
Original Swiched to PT voltage in the Switched to
working standby working channel standby
channel channel
A B
B A
B C
A C
C B
C A
5. Test for reversion

Working at 3 different channels, check if the manual and automatic reversion is at
normal state.
A B C
Manual Automatic Stop Manual Automatic Stop Manual Automatic Stop
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Attention: “manual reversion” means to operate the reversion switch on site.
“Automatic reversion” means the command input from the remote terminal.
“Shutdown reversion” means the machine unit frequency is lower than the excitation
system reversion frequency.
7-26
6. Analogue remote operation

Check if the initiation, excitation increase, excitation reduce and reversion is at
normal state, if the indicator lights are at normal state.
Channel A results:
Channel B results:
Channel C results:
7. V/f restraint characteristic

The V/f restraint value is set at 110% rated valuein the automatic channel. When
the frequency is lower than 45Hz, the regulator qutomatically reverses. Check the
correctness of the alarm signals of “V/f restraint”.
Regulator channel
V/f restraint value
Reversion frequency
(Hz)
8. Frequency test
Frequency
PT voltage
9. System voltage tracking

System voltage tracking is on. The terminal voltage should be able to automatically
track the system voltage.
Results:
10. Power disappearance test

With electricity supplied by the sigle way power, the regulator should be able to
work normally.
Switch AC off, switch DC on Switch DC off, switch AC on
Results: Results:
11. Automatic switch test
7-27
The regulator works at channel A , similate the following faults respectively, the
regulator should be able to switch to the standby channels without vibration on the
generator voltage.
A: 1PT phase loss results:
Meathod: cut any of the 1PT 3-phase input voltage
B: Power error: microcomputer channel 5v power results:
Meathod: turn off the power switch QF03 of regulator in channel A.
C: regulator error results:
Method: restore the CPU of regulator in channel A.
When the regulator is working at B channel, similate the above error, the regulator
should be able to switch to channel C, without vibration in the generator voltage.
Results:
12.Over-excitation limit test

Modify the over-excitation restraint value in the A/B regulator, similate the
over-excitation restraint, check the stability after the restraint action, and check the
correctness of the “force-excitaion” , “over-excitation restraint” alarm signals.
Attention: when the sampling excitation current inside the regulator is larger than
the preset over-excitation restraint time, the “force-excitation” alarm signal would be
sent out. When the over-excitation anti-timage is due, the “over-excitation” signal
would be sent out.
12. Regulation of channel C 110%over-voltage limit

Channel A or B is working. Short connect the CT signal circuit to make the feeback
signal as 0. at this moment, the control signal in channel C is the lowest. Regulate W2
potential device in channel C to make the control signals in channel C compatible
with that in the working channels. Switch to C channel. The terminal voltage remains
the same, and then regulate W2 potential device at channel C to set the terminal
voltage as 110% reted value.
Results:
7-28
13. Revertion command test when On-line breaker lock

Analogue on-line breaker on, reversion command is ineffective. Results:
Analogue on-line breaker on, intelligent de-excitater switch is ineffective.
Results:
14. Step test
Order Phase Termina Step up Vibration Regulator Step down Vibratio Regulat
No. step l voltage regulati times for y time for regulation n times ory time
quantit before on step up step up quantity for step for step
y step quantity down down
Attention: this test is done through the commissioning software. If the results
are not satisfactory, operators can modify the TA3,TA4 parameter of the AVR.
Because of the great rotor time constant difference between the testing machine units
and the actual machine units, this test is just for reference, which means that the actual
phase step test should be done on site.
15. Record for excitation system output signal

Order Items Contact signal Screen signal
No. without power
1 1PT error
2 2PT error
3 Set A testing system error
4 Set B testing system error
5 Set A power error
6 Set B power error
7-29
7 Set A regulator error

8 Set B regulator error
9 Set C regulator error
10 V/f restraint
11 Over-excitation restraint
12 Force-excitation
IX. ON-Load close loop testing

Increase the voltage from 0 volt to the rated value, operators should pay attention to
the indication on the corresponding table on the gauge screen of the testing machines.
When interconnecting the machines, regulate the terminal voltage as well as the
generator spinning speed, to make the spinning speed of the corresponding table as
slow as possible. When the indicated needle nears to the angle of 0 degree, switch on
the interconnection button. This done, the machines are interconnected, when the
shock to the generator is the lowest. After interconnection, check the regulator screen
to make sure the indicator light of “interconnection” is on.
1. Negative charge in interconnection

Chanenl A results:
Channel B results:
Channel C results:
Attention: operators can increase or reduce active power through regulation of the
generator spinning speed, while the increase or reduce of reactive power can be
achieved through regulation of excitation current output.
2. Polarity check in deviation regulation

Set the polarity as positive deviation regulation.
Channel A results:
Channel B results:
Attention: the polarity and grade of this regulation can be set through the
operational bottons on the screen of the regulator. When the deviation regulation is set
7-30
as positive, the increase of grade results in the decrease of reactive power of the
machine unit.
3. Test for under-excitation restraint

When the genrator active pwer is getting close to 0, the de-excitation makes the
generator’s reactive power negative. Till the function of under-excitation restraint is
stimulated, the reactive power of the generator would not increase any more. Check
the correctness of alarm indicator and the output of signal contact.
Keep the generator in the state of reactive power, gradually increase the active
power of the generator, and check the generator reactve power value, which should be
reduced accordingly.
In the process of under-excitation, the system is in a steady state. Increase
excitation, and the regulator will exit the under-excitation restraint.
Channel A results:
Channel B results:
Attention: in this test, operators can temporarily reduce the setting value of
under-excitation.
4. Constant reactive power regulation test

Increase excitation so as to make the generator reactive power positive, set the
regulator as “constant Q regulation “ through the regulatory software or the
operational bottons on the screen, and the excitation system would regulate based on
the the current reactive value and increase or reduce the active power. In this process,
the reactive power remains the same. Operators check the correctness of the status
display and the signal contact output.
Exit the constan Q regulation, connect the commissioning software and the serial
interface of the regulator, input the command “constant reactive power regulation”
and set the reactive value to the excitation system through BitBoy software and
RS485/RS232, the regulator would regulate according to the set value of the
command. Check the correctess of the status display and the output of signal
contact.
7-31
Channel A results:
Channel B results:
5. Constant power coefficient regulation test

Increase excitation so as to make the generator reactive power positive, set the
regulator as “constant PF regulation “ through the regulatory software or the
operational bottons on the screen, and the excitation system would regulate based on
the the current power coefficient and increase or reduce the active power. In this
process, the reactive power remains the same. Operators check the correctness of the
status display and the signal contact output.
Exit the constan PF regulation, connect the commissioning software and the serial
interface of the regulator, input the command “constant PF regulation” and set the
reactive value to the excitation system through BitBoy software and RS485/RS232,
the regulator would regulate according to the set value of the command. Check the
correctess of the status display and the output of signal contact.
Channel A results:
Channel B results:
Attention: (1) when channel C is in operation, both constant PF and constant Q
regulation are ineffective. (2) When the reactive power is lower than 0, the constant
PF regulation is invalid (3) when the constant Q and constant PF regulation are
invalid, the status display and the output of signal contact should exit, too.
6. Record for excitation system output signals

Order Items Contact signal Screen
No. without power signal
1 Under-excitation restraint
2 Constant Q reglation (handy
control)
3 Constant PF regulation (handy
control)
4 Constant Q reglation
7-32
(communication control)
5 Constant PF regulation
(communication control)
X. Grand electric current testing

parrelel connected. Switch off the wire from the excitation change secondary volt in
the testing machine unit to the excitaion cubicle. Introduce wire from the grand
currentn voltage transformer to the rectifier bidge input terminal. Switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, connect the the rotor
in the testing machine unit to the grand current testing load and switch off the
interconnection circuit breaker. As to the intelligent power controller system, the
secondary cable of testing voltage transformer should go hrough CT, and the output
terminal of CT should be introduced to the CT wiring terminal at the excitation
cubicle.
Set channel A and B in the manual operation mode, set the parameter TB1, TB2 of
constant IL regulation as 0.1, 4 for the time being.
Input the AC input current of rectifier, measure and check the phase order as a
positive one. Switch on the interconnection circuit breaker to make the PT signal
electrical. The regulator is in the state of operation. The output value of excitation
current should be the excitation current low limit of regulator A/B, accounting for
5~10% of the rated current.
Operate the excitation increase botton and the excitation current increases
accordingly.
1. Excitation current calibration

Based on the current divider output, calibrate the regulator, power controller and
the de-excitater current display.
Attention: calibrate the regulator current display when the cannel is not in opertion.
Record for regulator excitation current calibration
7-33
Output Output Set A Set B Set A excitation Set B excitation

current (%) current current current current coefficient current
(A) display display coefficient
Record for power controller excitation current output calibration

Output current (%) Output 1#cubicle current 2#cubicle current
current (A) display (A) display (A)
50%
75%
100%
LCD display positive
bridge arm K value
LCD display negative
bridge arm K value
LCD display B value
Record for power de-exciter current output calibration

Output Output Transducer LCD LCD LCD Ammeter
current current output current display display quantity
(%) (A) (mA) display B value K value (A)
(A)
7-34
Attention: for the convetional system there’s no need to calibrate the power
controller and the de-excitater parameter except the output value of exciation current
transducer.
2. Test for rectifier on/off

In the rated output current, operators use the switch for this test.
Results:
Attention: when there’sjust 1 power controller, there’s no power controller pulse cut
switch.
3. Regulation of automatic current balancing
3.1) Regulation of bisectrix signal

Based on the priciple that under the circumstance of rated excitation current, the
current bisectrix is 10m A, input all power controllers, IL=1.0, regulate the W1
potential device on the switch quantity board to make the voltage at the EL-Q point:
2.5v/cubicle quantity.
Make sure this test done:
3.2) Regulation of current balancing

When all the automatic current balancing is off, find out the power controller with
the biggest current output and then put all the automatic current balancing on again.
Regulate the deviation quantity on the power controller picked out, until the balancing
effect is satisfactory. Record the results in the following table.
Test data when all the automatic current balancing is on
Total Divider Current 1#cubicle 2#cubicle De-excitater Current
current output display of the current current current balacing
output (A) (Mv) regulator (A) display display display (A) coefficient
(A) (A) (%)
7-35
Parameter record for balancing calibration

1#power 2#power 3#power 4#power
controller controller cntroller controller
Positive bridge arm
calibration value
Negative bridge arm
calibration value
Attention: conventional power controller needn’t being tested as above-mentioned.
Test data when automatic current balancing is all off:
Total Divider Current 1#cubicle 2#cubicle De-excitater Current
current output display of current current current balacing
output (A) (mv) the regulator display (A) display (A) display (A) coefficient
(A) (%)
4. Wind channel temperature calibration in the rectifier

Make sure this test finished:
5. Calibration of de-exciter rotor temperature KT=
Attention: conventional power controller needn’t being tested as above-mentioned.
6. Fan shutdown test (no less than 30 minutes)

6.1) Silicon component type standard:
6.2) Temperature measurement
Room-emperature: ℃, 1#cubicle power controller output current : Measure
the silicon component surface temperature in the condition of shutdown fan A.
Time 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1#components
7-36
temperature (℃)
3#components
temperature (℃)
5#components
temperature (℃)
4#components
temperature (℃)
6#components
temperature (℃)
2#components
temperature (℃)
Room-emperature: ℃, 2#cubicle power controller output current : Measure

the silicon component surface temperature in the condition of shutdown fan A.
Time 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1#components
temperature (℃)
3#components
temperature (℃)
5#components
temperature (℃)
4#components
temperature (℃)
6#components
temperature (℃)
2#components
temperature (℃)
Attention: only those power controller systems with more than 1000A need this test.
7-37
At the same period, a single silicon component would not exceed 5℃, or there amy be
something wrong with the silicon component or the units. In this circunstance,
operators should lay emphasis on this test and prolong the testing time.
XI. Factory set parameter

Insulation and dielectric strength testing
XII. Insulation and dielectric test
1. Insulation test
Main excitation circuit to the ground MΩ
Results:
DC operation circuit to the groud MΩ
Results:
AC power circuit to the groud MΩ
Results:
2. Frequency dielectric strength test

Main excitation circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground v
Results:
DC operational circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground v
Results:
AC operational circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground v
Results:
7-38
Appendix 2 “Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000

excitation system”
I. The necessay conditions for commissioning
1. The following preparation should be done by the users before
the site commissioning

z Make sure that all the cubicles are properly installed according to the
diagram “the arrangement diagram of excitation cubicles” in the excitation
system. Pay attention to the correctness of the arranging direction and order
of the cubicles.
z Lay all the cables and wires and check the lines according to the diagram,
including checking the voltage mutual-inducer, current mutual-inducer and
protection circuit and prevent no short circuit in voltage mutual-inducer and
no open circuit in current mutual-inducer.
z Make sure that the AC; DC system has the power for power supply for the
excitation system.
z If operators are doing some tests on generator and other main tests, such as
the generator short circuit test, they should prepare the temporary power
supply for voltage transformer and the switch.
z Other equipments such as protection eqipment, electric substation, water
turbine, speed regulator, gas turbine, gas machine regulator, generator and
auxiliary eqipment should be prepared well several days ahead.
z Get ready for the preservation and protection measures.
Attention: the control contact for other control unit to the excitaion machine set
should be empty contact without power, or the power would burn the internal
components.
2. The following preparation should be done by the engeneers of
excitation set up before the site commissioning.
7-39
z Make sure that all the cubicles are properly installed according to the diagram
“the arrangement diagram of excitation cubicles” in the excitation system. Pay
attention to the correctness of the arranging direction and order of the cubicles.
z Check the laid cables and wires according to the diagram, including checking the
voltage mutual-inducer, current mutual-inducer and protection circuit and prevent
no short circuit in voltage mutual-inducer and no open circuit in current
mutual-inducer.
z Double check the parent wires cross the cubicles, cables and BUS in the
excitation system to make sure its correctness.
z Especially check the wiring of de-excitater switch and the over-excitation
protection circuit
z Double check correctness of voltage and polarity input into the AC/DC power
from outside.
z Check the correctness of in-phase voltage transfomer and its primary grade
II. Operation and signal circuit testing
1. Check the power supply circuit

Switch off the switch connecting the outside power and the excitation cubicle and
the fast fuse. Input the outsidepower and check if the input power voltage and polarity
is at normal state at the power input terminal.
Uab Ubc Uac
Factory power section I
Factory power section II
DC power section I
DC power section II
Power for swith on
Power for excitation
Check the power circuit inside the excitation cubicle with a universal meter,
including the AC power circuit, DC power circuit, DC24v power circuit, DC 12v
power circuit, and DC5v power circuit, to make sure there’s no problem of short
7-40
circuit. Then switch on the switch, making the power supply available. Check if the
following power is at normal state at the power output terminal.
Items DC 24v DC power Regulator power supply
power DC electricity Channel A Channel B
operation supply
2. Flashing
Handy manual results:
Automatic initiation results:
Attention: to prevent electricity moving to the rotor circuit, the swich of excitation
should be turned off. Operators can check the normality of the initiation circuit
through the action of excitation contactor. Keep the initiation once it is on, unless the
initiation time is up or the operator manually stops the initiation.
If the residual voltage initiation is not on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation
witout successfully establishing the voltage, the initiation would automatically stop
and sends out signals “initiation failure”.
If the residual voltage initiation is on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation witout
successfully establishing the voltage, the auxiliary power supply would be
automatically put into use. 5 seconds later, the initiation stops automatically and sends
out signals “ initiation failure”.
Results:
Flashing polarity Results:
Attention: in checking theinitiation polarity, there should be an excitation power
supply, which should be switched on. To prevent electricity moving to the rotor circuit,
the swich of excitation should be turned off. Then switch on the main contactor of
Q61 to measure the voltage between the positive and negative wire on the
dde-excitater switch and its polarity.
3. Fan operation
7-41
Manually switch on and off the fans. Normal operation:

Attention: intelligent power controller system operats the fan switch on the display
screen, while the conventional power controller system has a manual switch inside it.
Automatically switch on and off the fans. Normal operation:
Attention: if the startup command R651 is effective, the fans would be turned
automatically.
Automatic switch of fan Normal operation:
Power plant switch Results:
Fan operational status signal indicator Normal display:
Attention: when the power conroller applies the A /B two fans, the direction and
status indicator of both fans should be checked.
4. De-excitater switch operation

Handy manual switch on and off the brake Normal operation:
Remote operational switch on and off the brake Normal operation:
Accident and invertion failure brake Normal operation:
Line II brake circuit Normal operation:
De-excitator switch status signal indicator Normal display:
Correctness of de-excitater switch auxiliary contact output results:
5. Check of illumination and heater results:
6. Check the input signal from outside of the excitation system

Order External input signals Display on the DI lights on the I/O
screen board
1 Increase-excitation --- DI.1
2 Reduce-excitation --- DI.2
3 PSS locked When PSS is at
work,DI.5 light is on,
7-42
and then the lock signal

is input and the light
DI.5 is off.
4 Brake of Circuit breaker DI.6
at the exit of the genertor
5 Startup command DI.9
6 Stop command DI.10
Attention: input the external signals through the short connected wire. Then test
through the direct input of signals from the remote control.
7. Check the input signal of the excitation system

Similate the following output signals, observe the relay on the IO board and see if
the indicator light is on. At the same time check if the corresponding contact of relay
is connected, and if the indication for remote monitoring system is correct.
Order Items Indicater lights Relay Remote
No. on the IO contactor display
board action
1 Channel A working
2 Channel B working
3 Channel C working
4 Channel B standby
5 Channel C standby
6 Constant IL
regulation
7 Automatic mode
8 PSS input
9 Over-excitation
protection
10 DC power section I
off
7-43
11 DC power section II
off
12 AC power off
13 De-excitater switch
on
14 De-exctater switch
off
15 De-excitater switch
off mistakenly
16 1#power contrller
error or exit
17 2#power contrller
error or exit
18 Set A power error
19 Set B power error
20 24v power error
21 Communication error
22 Initiation failure
23 Over-excitaton --- ---
protection exit
Attention: (1) according to the semand of users, the signals at contact point without
power may not be totally identiacal to the above signals. The acutual value should be
checked according to the special diagram. (2) Other signals, such as “PT “ error, the
“regulator error” can be tested in the open loop testing.
8. Excitaion communication check

Connect the RS485 with the monitoring system, so the monitoring system would
send controlling command to the excitation system based on the bilateral agreement
assigned by both sides. At the same time, the monitoring system would also
parallelize signal wires at the excitation system serial communication interface,
7-44
converted by the RS485/RS232 then connected to the commissioning computer.

Operators use the BitBoy software to monitor if the output signal and the reaction
signal in the excitation system are at normal state.
Make sure checked:
Attention: the outward serial interface in EXC9000 system is RS485. In the
process of commissioning, it is necessary to setup the convertion mode RS485/RS432
for testing.
III. Open-loop testing

Wiring way:
(1) Unfold the wire inside the cubicle introduced through 1PT, 2PT; unfold the DC
cable from the output polar of the de-excitater switch to the fenerator rotor; unfold the
cables from the excitation change secondary volt to the power controller rectifier
bridge.
Attention: if there are too many DC cables from the output polar of the
de-excitater switch to the fenerator rotor to unfold all of them, operators can cut the
de-excitater switch and cut the rotor load. But remember to remove the signals of “cut
pulse with devided brakers” and “reversion with devided brakers”, or the regulator
would not be able to work normally.
If there are too many cables from the excitation change secondary volt to the power
controller rectifier bridge to unfold all of them, operators can devide the anode switch
of the rectifier bridge, cut the input power from the excitation voltage transformer and
at the same time, cut off the fuse on the primary volt of the in-phase voltage
transformer so as to connect the in-phase power supply.
(2) The 3-phase power supply is introduced to the primary volt of the 3-phase voltage
regulator through the air switch and operators should make sure that the input power
is positive-phase. The secondary volt of this regulator replace 2PT,1PT, the input
terminal of PT signal as well as the anode switch of the rectifier bridge. The capacity
of the 3-phase voltage transformer should be no less than 3KVA.
(3) The rotors off, operators use eletric furnace or resistor with a certain capacity to
7-45
take place of the rotors. Connect them to the output side of the rectifier as the
commissioning load. The capacity should be about 30Ω, with a capacity of more
than 1KW.
(4 )The point of the ondoscope should be connected to the rectifier bridge for the sake
of observing the output excitation voltage waveforms.
1. Record the actual corresponding value of the 10% voltage

ActionvalueUpt= Feedback value Upt=
2. Setup for the set value

Channel A preset Channel Bpreset Channel C preset
Attention: when the “0 voltage initiation “ is operable, the preset value of Channel
A and B IS 10%, while it is not operable, the preset value is 97%. When the preset is
at normal state in channel C, the preset value is the low limit of its current regulation.
3. Check the automatic channel characteristics

Without changing the preset value, the control signal in channel A and B should rise
as the PT voltage rises, and should decrease as the PT voltage decreases. The
feedback signals in Channel C are the excitation current, which remains unchanged
even the PT changes.
Without changing PT voltage, in excitation increase, control signals decrease, and
αangle shrinkd; in excitation decrease, control signals increase and αangle swell.
Without changing PT voltage, similate remote increase or reduce excitaion by
means of short circuit, the controlling signals should be working normally.
Without changing PT voltge, actually increase or reduce the excitation through
remote monitoring system, the controlling system should be at normal state of work.
Results:
Attention: because there’s the function to prevent excitation increase or decrease
points from sticking to each other, in operation of excitation increase or decrease, the
time for conneting should not exeed 4 seconds, or the command is ineffective.
7-46
4. Check for the rectifier output waveforms

Located in channel A and B, used to check the waveforms from each rectifier
bridge, with continual alteration and without mutation.
Results:
Attention: when there are more than 2 rectifier bridges in the system, separate
check for each rectifier bridge is necessary. At the same time, cut the AC current input
or triggering pulse in the rest of the rectifiers.
5. Test for channel C

Short connected the JP1 on analogue quantity board by jumper code, switch to
channel C, and observe the waveforms from the rectifier. The operation of exctation
increase or decrease should be able to symmetrize the waves and should be
continually adjustable.
Results: normal
After the test, get the PJ1 out. Make sure this done: confirm
6. Reversion failure test

Input rated PT voltagein the regulator, please set the “rectifier/reversion” switch at
the post of “reversion” or the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after
receiving the command, the PT voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the
de-excitater switch is turned on by the relay protector caused by reversion failure and
check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
7. Test for forbidden reversion after interconnection

Input rated PT voltagein the regulator, similate the interconnection signal input with
short connected wires, set the “rectifier/reversion” switch at the post of “reversion” or
the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after receiving the command, the PT
voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the inversion failure will not occur
and the failure protection relay would not start up the de-excitater switch.
Results:
7-47
8. Test for over-voltage restraint

After input rated PT voltagein the regulator, continue increase the PT voltage till it
reaches to about 110% of the rated value. The “V/F restraint” signal would take action;
observe if the signals are at normal state.
Results:
9. Test for pulse cut circuit

Power controller withdraw switch “on” for the cubicle withdrawal, and “off” for its
onstate. Observe the LCD, impulse indicator lights on power controller pulse board
and the output waveforms in the rectifier bridge, to make sure the function of the
switch is at normal state.
Results:
Attention: when there’s only one power controller, there’s no switch for pulse cut.
10. Check for de-exictation switch cut pulse

Similate the signal “cut pulse with devided braker” and send it to the regulator,
make sure that there is no pulse output.
Results:
11. Test for automatic switch

Regulator works at channel A, analogue the following errors, the regulator should
be able to switch to channel B or C. Observe the normality of status of display signals
and the signals sent out to the monitoring system.
A: 1PT phase loss: Results:
Test meathod: cut off any of the 3-phase input voltage.
B: power error (the 5v power in the microcomputer channel Results:
Test meathod: cut off the power switch QF03 in regulator A
C: Regulator error Results:
Test meathod: restore the restoring botton on the CPU board in regulator A.
When the regulator is working in channel B, analogue the above errors respectively,
the regultor should be able to automatically switch to channel C without too much
7-48
vibration in the generator voltage.

Results:
12. Check normal state of the 90%Ug fan power supply

Results:
13. Check of the excitation output signals

Analogue the following signals, observe the indicator lights on the IO board for
relay output to see if they are on and at the same time, check if the relay contactor is
connected and whether the remote monitoring indication is correct.
Order Items Display of the Relay Remote
No. indicator contactor display
lights on the action
IO board
1 1PT error
2 2PT error
3 Set A test system error
4 Set B test system error
5 Set A power error
6 Set B power error
7 Set A regulator error
8 Set B regulator error
9 Set C regulator error
10 V/f restraint
11 De-excitation failure
IV. Generator short circuit testing

The test of short circuit dry and circuit characteristic on the generaror sets are
actually not inclusive in the tests of the excitation system and the rectifier generally
carries it out through the power supplied by power of changeable voltage. As the
capacity of the generator sets is becoming bigger and bigger these years, the
7-49
changeable rectifier power can no longer meet the requirement of the test, which
means that the excitaion system is needed for the short circuit test. Since the
generator terminal has already been short circuit, the excitation power needs other
source of power supply. There are 2 modes:
(1) After the electricity is reversed, the excitation voltage transformer supplies
the power
(2) Connect the power through the electricity from the factories: get electricity
from 6kV or 10Kv wire to the excitation voltage transformer, or use the
factory testing voltage tranformer in place of the excitation voltage
transformer.
Stop serious alarm:operators should close the functions of “residual voltage
exctation”, “system voltage tracking “ and “channel tracking”, and switch off the
excitation switch. At the same time, the operation of initiation botton and
switchingchannel is forbidden, which is to prevent abnormality.
Before the test, operators should first of all, check the correctness of the order
phase of the power. Make sure it is of positive phase.
Generall speaking, in the above 2 modes, to carry out the short circuit test, there are
the following wiring ways:
1. Short circuit test when the point is inside the PT terminal

In this mode, the point is at the PT terminal, the terminal volt is unfold outside the
shortcircuit point, the interconnection switch of generator is on, and after the
electricity reversion, the excitation change as well as the PT terminal is charged at the
same time.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the
following:
1) Detach the “interconnection command” in the external terminal line;
Attention: because in this way the electricity upply is resersally provided, which is
not the real generators interconnection, this signal should be removed.
7-50
2) De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the “devide pulse cut” signal
in the regulator
3) Connect an electric furnace or a resistoric load at the input terminal of the
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope. operators get ready to
observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of
regulator and rectifier is at normal state.
4) The machine units are in the state of shutdown, the regulator powered off, switch
on the interconnection switch at the side of generator outlet, which would provide
electricity for the excitation voltage transformer and PT, check the phase order of the
rectifier bridge input power to ensure the positive phase.
5) Switch off the interconnection switch, resend electricity to the regulator, and set the
regulators in A/B channel into the mode of “constant excitation regulation”. Short
connect the JP1 of the regulator in channel C on the analogue quantity board, set the C
channel in the mode of “constant control angle regulation”
6) Regulators switched to channel C
Attention: this is the first time the excitaton system is tested with the generator unit,
so it is impossible to judge if the current feedback is normal. Channel C doesn’t need
the current feedback signals in the “constant angle control regulation” mode, which
is safer and more reliable. .
7) Switch on the interconnection switch at the exit of the generator, providing
electricity for the excotation voltage transformer and PT. Regulator set C will begin to
work normally, and send out pulse signals.At this moment, the set signal of channel C
is at its loe limit, the output of excitation voltage is 0.
8) Operate the excitaion increase botton on the regulator to add the set value of
channel C, the control signals in channel C would s decrease accordingly, while the
output voltage of the rectifier would increase. At this moment observe the voltage
waveform to see if it is steady and if there’s mutation.
9) Operate the excitaion decrease botton on the regulator to reduce the set value of
7-51
channel C, the control signals in channel C would increase accordingly, while the
output voltage of the rectifier would decrease. At this moment observe the voltage
waveform to see if it is teady and if there’s mutation.
10) When the output voltage reaches it maximum value, wind the botton
“rectifier/reversion” to the position of “reversion”. The output voltage should drop to
0, and make sure if it is normal.
11) After the above tests, operators can judge the performace of the regulator and
rectifier. Switch off the interconnection switch, and turn on the de-excitater, so that
the “devided braker pulse cut” returns to normal state.
The steps for short circuit test:

1) Set the machine unit at a certain spinning speed, make sure that the command of
interconnection signal is removed, and the functions of “residual initiation”,
“ssystematic voltage tracking” and “channel tracking” are off, switch off the initiation
power switch, and make sure that the JP1 jumper in the regulator of analogue quantity
BUS channel C.
2) Power the regulator and swith it to channel C.
Attention: operators can also adopt the “constant control angle” mode in channel
A/B, but this should be set through the commissioning software. After that, the
indicator lights for this mode would be on. Input the maximum signal through the
commissioning software.
Attention: restart the regulator in channel A/B, thus exiting the “constant control
angle” mode. In the process of the test remember to make sure the regulator in
channel A/B is in the “constant control angle” mode.
3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally,
operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
accordingly, the rotor current would increase, as well as the stator short circuit in the
generator current. Observe the normality of rotor current in the regulator, and then
cooperate with the testing department of the generators to finish the short circuit dry
test or the short circuit characteristic test.
7-52
4) After the test, set channel A/B in the “automatic mode” once again. Detah the JP1
in channel C, and get ready to carry out the other-excitation idle-loaded pressure
build-up test.
Attention: don’t switch the channels in this test, when adopting the “constant
control angle mode”, operaters had better to set all the 3 channels into this mode.
2. Short circuit test when the point is outside the PT terminal

In this mode, the point is outside the PT terminal, the terminal volt is unfold outside
the shortcircuit point, the interconnection switch of generator is on, and after the
electricity reversion, the excitation change is charged, but the PT terminal is off
charge.
The procedure of the test is more or less the same as the first method mentioned
above. But as the PT is off charge, it is necessary to provide a 10% terminal voltage
signal for the regulator after the reversal supply of electricity, so as to make the
regulator work properly.
There are 2 ways in which to get the R631 signal:
1) Short circuit R631 and R602 in the X2 terminal on the AP3 board so that the
regulator can receive the signals for start up and begins to work. The 3 channels can
all be tested; other steps are the same as the first wiring way of test.
2) After connection of the regulators A/B with the commissioning software, make the
regulators A/B enter the mode of “constant control angle”. Send out the command of
“forced start” to make regulators A/B work. After receiving this command the
regulator will start to work. Other steps are the same as the test for the first wiring
way.
Attention: the R631 signal obtained through the above mode is valid to all the 3
channels. Don’t switch channels in the process of the test, and it’s best to set the 3
channels at the mode of constant control angle.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the following:
1) Detach the “interconnection command” in the external terminal line;
7-53
De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the “devide pulse cut” signal in
the regulator
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope.
3) Operators get ready to observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of
regulator and rectifier is at normal state.
7) Switch on the interconnection switch at the exit of the generator, providing
electricity for the excotation voltage transformer
8) With the R631 signal, regulator set C will begin to work normally, and send out
pulse signals. At this moment, the set signal of channel C is at its loe limit, the output
of excitation voltage is 0.
channel C, the control signals in channel C would decrease accordingly, while the
7-54

BUS channel C.
3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally,
4) With the R631 signal, the regulator begins to work properly, and sends out pulse
signal. Operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
build-up test.
7-55
3. Power supplied by factory to the rectifier bridge

In this mode: operators can set the shortcircuit point at the export of generator,
without opening the terminal main circuit. The interconnection switch is off, with no
reversed electricity from the electric network the PT of terminal and excitation
changing uncharged.
While supplying electricity to the exictation voltage transformer through the 6k V
or 10 k V main circuit, it is necessary to unfold the cable from the voltage transformer
to the terminal then connect it to the main circuit.
When adopting this mode, it is necessary to detach the main circuit or cable from the
side with low voltage of the transformer to the rectifier bridge, and connect the AC
cable from the low-voltage side to the rectifier bridge.
The procedure of the test is more or less the same as the second method mentioned
above. But as the PT is off charge, it is necessary to provide a 10% terminal voltage
signal for the regulator after the reversal supply of electricity, so as to make the
regulator work properly.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the following:
1) De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the “devide pulse cut” signal
in the regulator
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope. Operators get ready
to observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of regulator
and rectifier is at normal state.
7-56
6) Switch on the excitation power
7) With the R631 signal, regulator set C will begin to work normally, and send out
pulse signals. At this moment, the set signal of channel C is at its low limit, the output
of excitation voltage is 0.
channel C, the control signals in channel C would decrease accordingly, while the
BUS channel C.
7-57
3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally
4) With the R631 signal, the regulator begins to work properly, and sends out pulse
signal. Operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
build-up test.
exctation” , “system voltage tracking “ and “channel tracking”, and switch off the
V. Other-excitation idle-loaded pressure build-up test in the
generator
In the above mode of short circuit test, it is only necessary to remove the
7-58
short-circuit point at the general terminal, other wires not changed. At this moment the
no-loaded pressure build-up test can be carried out. In the mode of other-excitation
mode, the system can still adopt the “constant control angle” mode. Operators can
also set channel A/B in the normal state, and carry out this test in channel A/B. In the
“constant control mode”, when building up pressure from 0-load it is necessary to
provide the R631 signal. The low limit value of the terminal voltage is the residual
voltage in the machine unit, which can approximate to 0. In the “automatic voltage
regulation”, when building up the voltage from 0-load, the low limit of the machine
terminal equals to the low limit of the regulator, which is usually 10% of the machine
rated voltage.
For the first time the test is carried out, operators should set the excitaiton mode as
“pressure built-up from 0-load” to make sure that the termiaal voltage is the lowlimit
of the regulator, for the sake of safety.
exctation” , “system voltage tracking “ and “channel tracking”, and switch off the
In this test, operators should focus on the phase order of the 3-phase voltage in the
generators. Make sure the phase order positive. If permitted, check the voltage from
the excitation voltage transformer to the rectifier bridge. Otherwise, when the machine
set recovers to the normal way of pressure build up, the excitation regulator may be
out of control if there’s anything wrong with the excitation changing voltage.
When the pressure is built up successfully, the electromachenic installation
companies or the generator testing team can carry out this test.
Attention: for many generators, this of test is carried out through the wiring way of
self-combined excitation, so it can be ommited.
VI. Idle-load close loop test
1. Check of the residual voltage and the voltage in the excitation
changing secondary circuit.

7-59
Residual voltage data:

1PT AB 1PT 1PT 2PT 2PT 2PT Excitation EXC. EXC
phanse BC CA AB BC CA transformer transformer transformer
(V) phase phase phase phase phase AB phase BC phase BC phase
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
Make use of the residual volage, check and make sure that the phase order of the
voltage in the secondary circuit is positive.
Or check the voltage phase through the open-loop test by means of reversed
electricity transport.
Make sure the phase check correct:
2. Rase voltage from 0

Select the function of “pressure built-up from 0” and turn it on, tune the terminal
voltage to the rated value after the pressure built. Record the 0-loaded data.
Order PT Excitation Excitation Control 1#power 2#power
No. voltage current volatge signal controller controller
current signal
7-60
Attention: operators can choose the exciation mode of “ switch on the pressure
flash from 0-load” by the functional bottons on the regulator display. In the process of
pressur build up, if the residual voltage is too high, >5~10V, operators can adopt the
mode of residual voltage excitaion. If the residual voltage is too low, operators can
use the auxiliary powr for exitation.
3. In-phase transformer check

Around the 0-load value, check the voltage correctness of the secondary circuit in
of the in-phase voltage transformer. Check the correctness of the size and polarity of
the rectifier voltage at the input side of the QF01operational switch; the rectifier
voltage should be 1.4 fold of the secondary circuit at the grade of 220V. Check the
correctness of the DC24V power output and record the data when voltage is 24v.
Confirmation:
Stop: attention: operators should never use the conventional universal meter to
measure the in-phase voltage in the primary circuit, to prevent damage to the spike
voltage.
4. Circuit check for the power voltage transformer of fans

Check the corrctnes of the secondary voltage at the fan power voltage transformer.
Confirmation:
Attention: operators should never use the conventional universal meter to measure
the in-phase voltage in the primary circuit, to prevent damage to the spike voltage.
Connet the AC current from the fan power voltage transformer and check the
correctness of the fan’s direction. Check the illuminators and the heater.
Confirmation:
5. Calibration of the PT voltage and the excitation current
7-61
Around the 0-load pressure value, the percntage at the testing terminal should be
compatible with the acutual value, or modify the parameter ID [4]; it is also the same
with the current. The excitaion current should be agreeable to the mearsurement of the
relay, or modify the parameter ID [3]. After modification, record the coefficient of the
terminal voltage and the exciattion current.
Coefficient for Voltage set Coefficient for excitation current set
A A
Coefficient for Voltage set Coefficient for exciation current set
B B
6. In-phase voltage calibration

First of all set the in-phase voltage coefficient as 1, and at the same time
modifies the parameter ID [8], so that the TSD1 shows the in-phase voltage value.
Record the PT voltage and the in-phase voltage, mdify the parameter based on the
PT/TSD value, till the in-phase voltage equals to the PT voltage. Record the
in-phase voltage coefficient:
Coefficient for Voltage set A
Coefficient for Voltage set B
Make sure JP1 is off confirmation:
7. Modification of the ranges

Add voltage to the channe A/B for the V/F action, and lowered it to less than 70%;
set the voltage in channel C as high as 110%, if permitted, switched to the
120%voltage for restriction and lower it to the minimum value
Record the data in the following table
Channel Regulating range Standard value Results
A Terminal voltage high limit: High limit: 110% rated voltage
B Terminal voltage high limit: High limit: 110% rated voltage
7-62
C Terminal voltage high limit: High limit: 110% rated excitaion

Low limit: voltage
Low limit: 10%~20% 0-loaded
excitation voltage
8. The accuracy regulation for set C tracking set B

Regulate W3 on the analogue quantity board, to make no vibrtion when channel B
is switched to Chanel C. If the voltage drops, regulate the device anti-clockwise,
otherwise clockwise. Repeat it till there is no vibration. Keep a record in the
following table.
Operational Switch to Operational Switch to
channel B standby channel channel A standby channel
C C
PT voltage (V)
9. The accuracy regulation for set B tracking set C

Operation in set B, finish set C tracking (LDD, LDI LIGHTS FLASH
ALTERNATIVELY), record the controlling signals Ukb in Set B and the controlling
signals Ukc. Modify the parameter set B to make the ID[6]=ID[6]*Ukb/Ukc,when set
C is switched to set B , there should be no vibration, otherwise remodify ID[6].
Record the data,
Original operational channel: C Switched to channel B
PT voltage (V)
10. The accuracy regulation for set A tracking set C

Operation in set A, finish set C tracking (LDD, LDI LIGHTS FLASH
ALTERNATIVELY), record the controlling signals Ukb in SetA and the controlling
signals Ukc. Modify the parameter set A to make the ID[6]=ID[6]*Uka/Ukc,when set
C is switched to set A , there should be no vibration, otherwise remodify ID[6].
Record the data,
Original operational channel: C Switched to channel A
7-63
PT voltage (V)
11. The accuracy regulation for set B tracking set A

Set the set B parameter ID [8] as 0, after finishing tracking, switch A to B. if the
voltage rises, the ranges of set B parameter ID [8] is between 1.000~1.100. If the
voltage drops, the ranges of set B parameter ID [8] is between 0.900~1.000.after
regulation, when set A is switched to set B, there should be no vibration, other wise
remodify ID [8]. Record the data:
Original operational channel: A Switched to channel B
PT voltage
12. The accuracy regulation for set A tracking set B

Set the set A parameter ID [8] as 0, after finishing tracking, switch B to A. if the
voltage rises, the ranges of set A parameter ID [8] is between 1.000~1.100. If the
voltage drops, the ranges of set A parameter ID [8] is between 0.900~1.000.after
regulation, when set B is switched to set A, there should be no vibration, other wise
remodify ID [8]. Record the data:
Original operational channel: B Switched to channel A
PT voltage (V)
13. Presetting value initiation

Flash once in each of the channel A, B, C, respectively, in the “normal” position.
All of them can establish terminal voltage according to the preset value. Adopt the
soft flash technique there should be no obvious overshoot.
Channel A PT voltage:
Channel B PT voltage:
Channel C PT voltage:
14. Reversion test

Check if the manual reversion and automatic reversion is at normal state in the 3
channels respectively
Channel A Channel B Channel C
7-64
Manul Automatic Stop Manul Automatic Stop Manul Automatic Stop
15. Analogue remote operation

Check if the functions of initiation, ecitaion increase, excitation decrease and
reversion in the center controlling room are at normal state, and the performanc of the
indicator lights
Channel A Results:
Channel B Results:
Channel C Results:
16. V/f restraint

The V/f value in the automatic channel is 1.100, which can be modified through ID
[84]; when the frequency is smaller than 45Hz, the reulator would reverse
automatically without the possibility of modifying the reversion frequency. When
the frequency is lower than the +-1% of the rated value, the change of the voltage is
less than +-0.25% of the rated value.
17. Frequency test

Change the spinning speed of the machine, record the terminal voltage and the
frequency, standard requirement: When the frequency is lower than the +-1% of the
rated value, the change of the voltage is less than +-0.25% of the rated value.
Frequency
PT voltage Reversion
18. Power disappearance test

Supplied by a single circuit power, the excitaion system should be able to work
properly. Before the test check the correctness of the 24v power supply
19. Overexcitation restraint test
Record the current value as the restraint value, lower the termianal voltage and
modify the overexcitation restraint value, re-excitate and check the stability of the
7-65
system after over-excitation.

Results:
20. Intelligent current balancing regulation

Find out the biggest output current power controller in the condition of automatic
current balancing off state. Then turn on the automatic current balancing and regulate
the deviation of it at the maximum output, till the effect is satisfactory.
21. Phase step test

To test the dynamic function of the system, with the standard rule of DL/T650-1998:
the phase step quantity as much as 5% rared value of the generator, the overshoot
quantity <30% of the phase step quantity, vibration <3 times, ascending time <0.6s,
regulation time<5s.
GB/T7409.3-1997: In thecondition of no load, when the rated phase step is +-10%,
the generator voltages overshoot<50%, vibration<3 times, and regulation time<10s.
On the touching screen there are 5% and 10%phase step bottons to choose from,
both are first step up then step down. Record the data:
Phase step Pre-step terminal Overshoot Vibration Regulation
quantity voltage quantity time
22. Devide the de-excitater switch test from no load

Devide the de-excitater switch when there is noload, record the data.
Local manual switch off the de-excitator switch, record the parameter if terminl
vltage, excitation current, de-excitation time by the commissioning soft ware. Observe
the de-excitation effect.
Results:
Attention: refer to the commissioning scheme for the system out of factory.
7-66
VII. Load close loop test
1. On-line
Attention: for the very first time of interconnetion, it is best to set in the channel
A/B/C manual mode.
1) After the voltage rise to a set value from the 0-load, the system can realize the
interconnection. Check the regulator screen, make sure the indicator light is on for
interconnection and at the same time check the correctness of the active and reactive
power.
Results:
Attention: if the result is more or less the same as the results mearsured by the
monitoring system, this shows the correctness of the PT and CT. If there is a great
difference, 2 reasons may be accountable: (1)the disagreeable parameters of PT , CT
actual value and the value set by the factory (2) there is something wrong with the
polarity of the PT and CT .
After making sure that the above result is cirrect, switch the regulator in the
automatic mode in channel A/B.
2) After interconnection, don’t increae or reduce excitaion for the time being, and
observe the reactive power immediately. If it is too large or negative, this proves that
the terminal voltage differs greatly from the eletric net voltage, great vibration occurs
in the process of interconnection and it is necessary to regulate the terminal voltage.
When adopting the automatic synchronic apparatus interconnection, operators
should regulate the voltage deviation setting, generally, to shrink it.
When adopting the “system voltage tracking “ interconnection, operators should
regulate the ID[5] : Kus, to make sure the system voltage<terminal voltage so that
there’s no vibration in interconnetion.
Results:
2. Interconnection with negative charge

After the regulation in intrcinnection, the generators then can add active and
reactive load normally.
7-67
Attention: in this process, if the power controller current balancing coefficient

doesn’t meet the requiry, operators can modify the intelligent coefficient on the screen
of the power controller.
3. Calibration check for active power reactive power and the
generator current
When the generator is jeavily loaded, calibrate the display of activ epower, reactive
power and the generator current.
A power coefficient A generator current coefficient
B power coefficient B generator current coefficient
4. Calibration check of the system voltage

Make sure the PT is connected, modify the parametr ID[18] , and make the screen
show the system voltage , regulate ID[5] , to make the system voltage =the terminal
PT voltage.
A voltage coefficient
B voltage coefficient
5. Deviation polarity check

Outo-of-factory value is usually set as 0.
The polarity and size of the deviation rate should be modified with the command on
site
Check the correctness of the deviation rate polarity.
Channel A Results:
Channel B Results:
Attention: the grade and the polarity can be set through the functional keys on the
dommissioning soft ware. When the polarity is positive, as the grade increases the
reactive power decreases.
Special attention: when the generator takes the mode of large-scale wiring, the
regulator can only adopt the positive mode. Or the machine set may jump.
6. Under-exciation restraint test

7-68
7. Over-excitaion restraint test
8. Constant Q regulation test
9. Constant PF regulation test
10. The throw of negative charge test and the generator voltage
regulator test
VIII. PSS commissioning test
1. Testing conditions
2. Testing instruments
3. The math mode of AVR
4. The math mode of PSS
5. Testing wiring
6. Frequency test of AVR and PSS
7. Phase step of no-loaded generator
8. Frequency test without compensation
9. PSS parameter design and setup
10. The frequency test with compensation
11. PSS input test
12. Generator loaded phase step reaction test
13. Measurement of PSS critical point interest add
14. PSS anti-regulaion test
15. PSS automatic input and output test
7-69
16. Remote control of PSS control

Signature of the operators on site:
Powerplant:
Electrimachenical installation unit:
The research institute of the electric test:
Guangzhou electric equipment scientific institute of
Date of test
7-70
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Manual operation
Chapter8 Mannul operation

1.1 Running modes of the generator ........................................... 4
1.2 No-load running of generator................................................ 4
1.3 Generator networking load running ...................................... 5
1.4 AVR functions working in power network............................ 6
2. Operation and display .......................................................... 9

2.1 Brief introduction.................................................................. 9
2.2 Examinition of the excitation system before starting up ..... 10
2.3 Operation of regulator before startup. ................................. 10
2.3.1 The switch of the regulator ........................................ 10
2.3.2 Set up for other operational mode ............................. 10
2.4 Operation of power controller before startup ...................... 12
2.4.1 Check of the state of power controller ............................. 12
2.4.2 Check of the power controller rectifier bridge................ 12
2.4.3 Check of the power controller fan power switch ............ 13
2.5.1 Check of the de-exciter switch .................................. 13
2.5.2 Check of the input circuit check of the excitation
power .................................................................................. 13
2.6 Operation of flashing ...................................................... 13
2.6.1 Residual voltage flashing stopping /flashing starting....... 13

8-1
2.6.2 Process of flashing..................................................... 13
2.6.3 Flashing failure .......................................................... 14
2.7 Zero voltage rising.......................................................... 14
2.8 Normal pre-set value voltage rising................................ 14
2.9 Manual mode .................................................................. 14
2.10 Generator rising .............................................................. 15
2.11 Channel tracking and switching...................................... 16
2.11.1 The standby relationship between cahnnels .............. 16
2.11.2 Channel tracking function starting and stopping...... 16
2.11.3 Manual switching between channels........................ 16
2.11.4 Automatic switching between channels ................... 17
2.12 System voltage tracking.................................................. 18
2.13 Increasing/decreasing operation ..................................... 18
2.14 Inverted and de-excitation .............................................. 19
2.15 V/f limit .......................................................................... 19
2.16 Recitifier operation ......................................................... 19
2.16.1 Fan control........................................................... 19
2.16.2 other operations ................................................... 20
2.17 De-exciter operation ....................................................... 20
2.18 Interconnection of generator units .................................. 20
2.19 Constant Q regulation or constant PF regulation ............ 21
2.20 Deviation coefficient setting ........................................... 21
8-2
2.21 Power system stabilizer starting/stopping (PSS) ............ 22
2.22 Excitation system cutoff by generator units fault ........... 23
2.23 Analogue quantity display .............................................. 23
2.24 Statuses and alarm messages .......................................... 24
3. Running of the system ........................................................ 25

3.1 Examination before starting ................................................ 26
3.2 Starting-up procedures ........................................................ 26
3.3 Examination during running ............................................... 27
3.4 Stopping procedures............................................................ 28
3.5 Urgent stopping................................................................... 28
4. Regulator panel indicating signal definitions ................... 28

4.1 DSP board ........................................................................... 28
4.2 I/O board ............................................................................. 29
8-3
This chapter is concerned about running guide of excitation system and particularly
things to be taken care of to avoid any fault during operation of the system. Safety
prevention measures to be taken are illustrated. Working characteristics of the
generator and that of the excitation system under automatic and manual operation
modes.
1.1 Running modes of the generator

The generator can run in the following modes.
1) No-load running with no load for the generator
2) Generator on load running
3) Loaded not networking running of generator with plant power.
Conditions for loaded running of generator with plant power are basically the
same with those for no-load running.
1.2 No-load running of generator

In case of no-load running of generator, its generator voltage equals to induce
electromotive force of rotor. With rotating speed as constant, terminal voltage of
generator lies directly in excitation current. Within rated voltage scope of generator, a
more or less linear relationship exists between terminal voltage of generator and
excitation current. If generator voltage exceeds rated value, a saturation effect occurs,
which is in essence decided by stator iron-core design. If the generator voltage is
increased further, the excitation current shall be increased greatly.
8-4
Ug
Saturation
Ugn
Generator
rated
voltage
No load
Ifo If
field current
Graph 1 No-load characteristics
1.3 Generator networking load running

In case of loaded running of generator, the current passing stator winding incurs
voltage drop when it passes synchronous reactance. The terminal voltage will drop if
excitation current keeps constant. Here the excitation system has the function of
preventing voltage drop through changing excitation current.
The whole range of stable running condition is usually described by power circle
graph as Graph 2.
P
Active power
1
Drive limit Rated power

Load angle Pf Field current
limit Generator limit
Sn
δ
-1 +1
-Q 1
xd Ifo + Q Reactive
Power
under over
excited Motor excited
Graph 2 Power circle graph of synchronous generator
8-5
Usually the upper semicircle is used to describe running of generator. The circle
has the origin of the coordinates as its center and rated apparent power Sn as its
semidiameter. Apparent power Sn is determined by allowed temperature of stator
windings. The allowed running range of generator is determined by drive limit on
active power axis. In addition, the running scope of reactive power axis is limited by
overexcitation rotor windings heat design while under excited scope is limited by
stability limit. Overexcitation limit scope is mainly determined by rated excitation
current. Rated working point of generator is intersection point of stator and rotor heat
limits. Within underexcitation scope, thermal capacity of heat does not work and it is
important to keep synchronization of the generator. Load angle of one certain working
point δ can by read from inclination between reactive power axis and excitation power
Pf in the graph. Usually the synchronous generator works in slightly lagging reactive
power scope. But on the other hand, to cater to condition of power network, proper
torque reserves shall be ensured for power network faults.
1.4 AVR functions working in power network

The voltage regulation system ensures that excitation current value necessary for
current working conditions shall be automatically regulated, which means on the one
hand, to keep the value required by stable running constant, on the other hand, it can
be quickly regulated in case the running conditions change.
z The line voltage shall keep within the acceptable limit.
z Stable distribution of reactive power shall be guaranteed among several

parallel generators in power plant.
z In the power network, distribution of reactive power should ensure minimum

line loss and the reactive power should keep constant in case of load changes.
z The generator shall be ensured to run within safety limit.
Under stable running conditions, in purpose of voltage automatic regulation, the

natural characteristics of generator and power network shall be partly corrected. To
this end, VR is also subject to influence by the reactive current.
8-6
In most cases, the generator is wired in power network through step-up transformer.
For this reason, reactance passing transformer and power network has natural
deviation rate with declining characteristics as in Graph 3. It shall be emphasized that
deviation rate represents only the relationship between reactive power variation and
voltage variation. And it cannot be mixed up with departure of proportional regulator.
Departure of contemporary regulator is set value minus actual value, usually 0~0.5%.
Effective reactive deviation rate can be set between -15% to +15%.
For the parrellel generators, in order to rationally allocate the reacitive power, it
must be set as the positive reacitive power. Usually the reactive deviation rate is set
between 4% and 10%, i.e. generator voltage declining value (4% for example) in case
of 1 p.u. reactive power.
In some cases, deviation rate shall be set as negative to compensate for voltage drop
incurred by passing of current in step-up transformer.
UG
pos. static
neg. static
-Q +Q
Graph 3 Deviation rate of AVR

Immediate reaction of AVR is required for load shedding. In this case, the
generator voltage changes immediately with disconnection of main switch, which is a
major quality characteristic of VR or excitation system.
8-7
Ug
Overvoltage relay
with constant field current
with AVR (static excitation system)
Uo
IQ x Xd "
t
t=0 1 Sec.
Graph 4 Load shedding

The drop of reactive power to zero inevitable incurs increase of voltage: ΔU = IQ.
Xd". For example, subtransient reactance is 0.2 p.u., and if 0.5 p.u. reactive power is
thrown off, there will be 10% voltage increase instantly, which can not be decreased
by any regulation. If there is no AVR, the voltage will increase continually until it
reaches the maximum value determined by synchronous reactance. The time of
voltage increasing is determined by no-load time constant Tdo.
The voltage is not allowed to increase further if there is VR. After a period of
regulation, the voltage returns to its original value. Quick achievement of this purpose
lies in design and type of excitation system. For static excitation system, it directly
regulates the excitation current of generator and the reaction time is shortest. However,
3-exciter excitation system must go through time constant of additional exciter. If
excitation system works under manual mode, the excitation current will be controlled,
which results in undesired increase of generator voltage until overvoltage relay of
generator protection trips the switch and incurs de-excitation of generator. To avoid
this phenomenon, set value of excitation current regulator shall return to no-load
excitation current value when main circuit switch of generator disconnects.
A short circuit of a certain distance will also incur great drop of reactive power
of generator.
8-8
UG with voltage regulator

UO
with constant field current
t
t=0 1 sec
Graph 5 Short circuit of a certain distance

For example, fault of a certain long distance incurs overvoltage and overcurrent
within a very short time. The excitation regulator provides maximum excitation
current to maintain the voltage. After the protection device eliminates the fault, the
generator voltage will grow as the load lightens. This overvoltage is regulated to its
original value by VR.
2. Operation and display

The excitation system is composed of a set of machines installed in power plant. In
normal cases it is subject to remote operation by the control room. Local control
screen directly installed on front panel of excitation system is only used in
commissioning, testing or urgent control. If a highly efficient control system is
installed in the power plant, the commands to excitation system are issued by this
control system.
Operators shall be familiar with operation of excitation system, design of display

unit, functions of commands for excitation system as well as good operation of these
control commands and display unit. The operators shall, through operation of the
excitation system, ensure that the generator fits in with working conditions in power
plant and power network.
There are two modes of control for excitation system as follows.
• Remote control------through monitoring system in control room
• Local control--------Local human-machine interface integrated in excitation system.

8-9
2.2 Examinition of the excitation system before starting up

Make sure the normality of other units besides the excitation system in the
generator
Make sure that the external AC/DC correctly sent into the excitation system
Make sure that there are no messages of error or alarm inside the excitation system
Make sure that the switch inside the systen and the one in the controlling power
are correctly switched on.
2.3 Operation of regulator before startup.

2.3.1 The switch of the regulator
Switch on the AC/DC power, switch the microcomputer switch, and tune the botton
of “rectifier / reversion” to the position of “rectifier”.
The AC, DC switch are bipolar air switches, which are generally installed in on the
rail on the right of the rectifier. Turn on the switch, the power is on, and the regulator
begins to work. The microcomputer switch is installed at the rear of the rectifier
with each channel corresponding to a switch. When the switch is turned off and
corresponding electricity is off, operators can change the board, with the
“rectifying/reversion” switch on the front door of the regulator.
Check the status of the regulator

(1) No. 4 light on the I/O board is flashing
(2) The communicative indicator lights are at normal state
(3) The regulator choosing the operation of set A, the standby of set B, and both sets
are automatic. Indicators of “channel A working” and “channel B stand by” are
on, and the “automatic” indicative light is on too. –Default status
2.3.2 Set up for other operational mode

(1) Enter into the “display-selection—setup of operation mode” on the
human-machine interface. Modify the regulator and if it cannot work properly,
carry out step 2 and change the setup.
(2) Change the setup; enter the display of “operational mode setting”. The following
8-10
functional keys are shown, which can be operted on directly. When the function
is on,
the indicator light turns red and the characters on the bottons change too.
Select the “manual operation” menu in the setup display, operators can set the
display manually. On this display, operators can set automatic mode or the manual
mode in channel A/B.
8-11
Other functions can be realized through this display, the default value as
following:
Order Name Dfault value Explanation
No.
1 Channel tracking Channel tracking on
2 Us tracking The last setting Electricity drop
memory
3 Constant Q regulation Constant rgulation off Setup on demand after
interconnection
4 Constant PF Constant PF off Setup on demand after
regulation interconnection
5 Rsidual voltage Last setting Electricity drop
excitation memory
6 Deviation setting Last setting
7 Pressur builtup from Pressur builtup from
0-loaded 0-loaded off
8 Manual operation Automatic operation Set
A/B
9 PSS operation Last setting Electricity drop
memory
2.4 Operation of power controller before startup

2.4.1 Check of the state of power controller
Make sure that the switch “ pulse cut” is off, showing that the normal output of the
pulse in this power controller.
2.4.2 Check of the power controller rectifier bridge

Make sure that the DC switch is on, showing that this rectifier bridge can work
properly
8-12
2.4.3 Check of the power controller fan power switch

Make sure the fan power switch is on, showing that this fan can work properly
after receiving the startup command.
Operation of de-excitater before startup
2.5.1 Check of the de-exciter switch

Make sure that the switch is in the position of “ brake up” or “brake down” and the
status display on the de-exciter corresponding to the actual position of the switch.
When the switch is in the position of “brake up”, on the de-exciter display,
operators can press botton F1 to enter the operational display of the switch, as well as
turn on the switch.
When the switch is in the position of “brake down”, operators can turn off the
switch.
Attention in the condition of interconnection, this operation should be avoided for
fear of excitation loss in the machine units.
2.5.2 Check of the input circuit check of the excitation power

Make sure that the initiation power switch is on, but even when auxiliary power is
adopted, it can supply normal initiation power.
2.6 Operation of flashing

2.6.1 Residual voltage flashing stopping /flashing starting
Enter into Other Settings window and you can select starting or stopping of residual
voltage flashing function.
2.6.2 Process of flashing

Upon starting of residual voltage flashing function, when there is starting command,
residual voltage flashing is started first. If voltage building is not successful within
10S, flashing power is started. When voltage is built up to 10% or flashing time limit
is reached, flashing power is switched off automatically.
Upon stopping of residual voltage flashing, when there is automatic or manual
starting command, flashing power is immediately started automatically. When voltage
8-13
is built up to 10% or flashing time limit (10S) is reached, flashing power is

automatically switched off.
2.6.3 Flashing failure

In case of automatic flashing, if the voltage does not reach 10% of rated terminal
voltage when flashing time limit is reached, the flashing failure signal will be issued.
2.7 Zero voltage rising

When the power is on, the default zero voltage rise function exits.
Enter into Other Setting window of human-machine interface; select Zero Voltage
Rise function launching. Check Voltage Pre-set Value displayed on
human-computer interface as 10%.
After voltage building, the increasing /decreasing excitation button can be used to
regulate terminal voltage.
2.8 Normal pre-set value voltage rising

After power is on, the default voltage rising is executed as per normal pre-set
value. The pre-set value can be set srbitarily through the commissioning software,
for detail information about the ways, refer to chapter 5.
Operators can also enter I to the initiation operation window to select the function
of “exit”. They can enter and check the HMI the preset value as the “set A/B Ug”.
By means of the conventional pressure building, the voltage at the terminal set
with the set value, after that the voltage can be changed by increasing/decresing the
terminal voltage.
Attention: Professionals design the preset value of the volt; ordinary persons
should not mdify the data arbitrarily.
2.9 Manual mode

There is Automatic Running mode (constant terminal voltage regulation) and
Manual Running mode (constant excitation current regulation) for Channels A and B.
But there is only Manual Running mode for Channel C.
The default running mode for Channels A and B is Automatic Running mode.
8-14
Before start-up, the current set value for Manual Running mode is always the
lowest limit (displayed as 0%).
After excitation voltage building up by auto, the current set value will be
automatically adapted to voltage set value, and voltage set value will be adapted to
voltage set value until outputs of the two regulation modes are the same to ensure
non-interfering switching between the two running modes.
Manual running mode is testing running mode or play as a transission of PT error.
In normal operation there is no need to adopt the manual mode.
2.10 Generator rising

The voltage can be controlled by both the remote or local control. The remote
control startup command is sent out when the monitoring system dectects the
spinning speed of the machine units reaches 95%. The startup command is required
to be connected with the system with contactor of no power supply, the time for
connection shold not be less than 15seconds. The monitoring system then sends
out command to the excitation system, which can be recovered in 15 seconds. Or it
can be restore after the voltage rise is successfully done, or the state may be kept for
the whole period.
The local exictaion is carried out through the touching screen on the HMI. Pay
attention to the more than 5 seconds’ of initiation.
When the regulator receives command of flashing, it will build voltage according
to the preset value. When ‘the 0 voltage rising “ is on, the steady voltage value is
about 10% of the terminal rated voltage; the “0 voltage rise “ is off, the steady value
of volt is the preset value, generally 100%.
If it is new generator or after big maintance of the generator, the system should
adopt the way of “0 voltage rising” mode. After this test, voltage can be established
through the conventional method, in which the soft flashing is adopted. With the
increasing of the terminal voltage until it reaches to the preset value, without
ovrshoot.
8-15
2.11 Channel tracking and switching

2.11.1 The standby relationship between cahnnels
The regulator concludes 3 channels A/B/C. Channel A is the main operating
channel while channel B is the main standby channel and C the main auxiliary one.
Channel A and B are of same structure in both hardware and software, which can
perform all the functions of the regulator. Channel C is just a simple analogue
channel with only the manual mode. When channel A is working, channel B/ C can
be manually selected as the standby channels. When channel B is at work it is
defaulted that the channel C is the standby channel. Channel A never acts as the
standby channel. When channel C is at work, there’ s no standby channel.
The indicator lights and the bottons on the front door of the regulator can show
and control the status of the working channel as well as the standby channels. The
channel switch logic is detailedly described in 2.11.3 in this chapter.
When re-electrified, the regulator defaults that the channel A is working and
channel B is acting as a standby channel, with both of the channel A/B in the
automatic mode.
2.11.2 Channel tracking function starting and stopping

After the system is power on again, the default Channel Tracking function is
launched.
After tracking function is activated, the non-working channels always tracks
working channel. For example, if Channel A is working, it will be tracked by
Channels B and C; if Channel B is working, it will be tracked by Channels A and C; if
Channel C is working, it will be tracked by Channels A and B. the tracking priciple:
matched controlling signals
Attention: the tracking of different channels is backed up not only by the “channel
tracking “ function starting but also the R631 signals.
2.11.3 Manual switching between channels

During the working process, if working channels are to be switched manually, the
8-16
Channel Tracking function shall be activated and control signals of current working
channel and of the target channel to be switched to shall be examined, which shall be
ensured to be fundamentally identical to avoid fluctuating switch.
The manual switching can be realized through the 4 bottons “ channel A working”
“channel B/C working”, “ channel B working/standby”, “ channel C
working/standby”. There are 5 indicator lights “ channel A working”, “channel B
working”, “ channel C working”, “ channel B standby’ and “channel C standby” to
show the status of the channels.
The logic of manual switch:
(1) In case Channel A is working press the botton “channel B working/stand by” and
the channel B may be set as the standby channel. If “channel C working
/standby” is pressed, channel C is choosed as the standby channel.
(2) In case channel A is working, press the botton “channel B/C working” , the
channel could be shifted to the standby channels. The standby channels can be
channel B/C.
(3) When channel B is working, channel C is defaulted as the standby channel, press
the botton “channel C working/standby”, the working channel could be shifted to
channel C.
(4) When channel C is working, there is no standby channel. Press the botton
“channel B working/standby”, channel B could be shifted to and channel C being
the standby channel.
(5) When channel B/C is working, press the botton of “channel A working”, channel
A could always been switched to, and the working channels of B/C automatically
becaome the standby channels.
2.11.4 Automatic switching between channels

In case of an accident in working channel, it will be automatically switched to
standby channel.
Power fault
Pulse fault
8-17
Regulator fault
PT fault
2.12 System voltage tracking

The excitation systrm has the function of “system voltage tracking” , when this
function is launched, the regulator would automatically regulate the output of
excitation current and control the terminal voltage at the generator, making it
concorded with the system voltage. In this way, in the interconnection of the
generators, the crush caused by the great deviation between the machine voltage and
the system voltage would be greatly reduced.
This function can be started or stopped through the HMI of the regulator, and the
status set can be finished without power.
Only when the calibration regulator voltage value measured on site is correct can
this function be started. When the following conditions are met for execution the
voltage tracking is valid:
The stator current <10% and the circuit breaker at the exit of the generator
is off
System voltage > 80%
Channel A/B in working mode
Attention: (1) generally speaking, in the commissioning of the excitation system,
under the function of “system voltage tracking”, the terminal voltage is somewhat
higher than the system voltage to avoid in-phase operation when the machines are
interconnected.
(2) Many power plants have the automatic in-phase apparatus as well as the
terminal voltage regulation before interconnection. If this function is launched, the
function in the exictation system of “ system voltage tracking “ should exit.
2.13 Increasing/decreasing operation

Increasing /decreasing excitation operation can be executed closely or remotely.
The terminal voltage shall be regulated in case of no load and reactive power is
regulated in case of load.
8-18
Increasing /decreasing excitation operation is effective only in running channel.

The increasing /decreasing excitation contact has anti-sticky function and valid
continuing time for increasing excitation or decreasing excitation is 4S.
2.14 Inverted and de-excitation

In case of a stopping generator command or in case commutation/inversion switch
on regulator panel is switched to the inverting position, inverting and de-excitation is
executed upon satisfaction of the following requirements.
Generating set disarrangement
Stator current < 10%
Attention: for the sake of reliable inverted and de-excitation, the holding time for
the stopping command: no less than 10seconds of the hydroelectric machine, and no
less than 15 seconds of the heat-electric machine.
2.15 V/f limit

The genrator operated no-loaded, the regulator A/B automatically run, if the ratio
between the terminal voltage and the frequency reaches the preset value of the V/f
value, the V/f limit would take place to limit the terminal voltage and keep the ratio
below the V/F limit to prevent overexcitation. At the same time, the system would
automatically lock the command of excitation increase. The V/f value can be set
through the regulating software.
When the frequency of the generator set is lower than 45Hz, and the regulator
receives the startup command, the “V/F restraint” signal would be sent out too.
In the no-loaded situation of the generator, and if the operators detect the “V/f
limit” signal, exictation decreasing should be carried out immediately till the signal
diminished. If the excitation function is invalid, operators can give the stopping
command or directly switch off the de-excitater switch.
2.16 Recitifier operation

2.16.1 Fan control
In the normal operation of the excitation system, the startup/stopping control is
8-19
automatically carried out. For anther part, through the operation of keys on the
recitifier display, operators can turn on and off the fans.
Conditions for fan automatic startup: with a “startup” command signal R651 or the
output current of this recitifier is larger than 100A.
Condictions for fan automatic stopping: the startup command disappear and the
current <50A.
When there is a double fan in the intelligent recitifier, operators can choose any of
them as the primary use and the other the standby. In the normal performace of the
fans, only the main fan is in use. If there is a start up command but errors are detected,
signals of “fan power error “ would be issued and at the same time, the standby fan is
qutomatically launced.
2.16.2 other operations

other operations includ:
calibration of recitifier output current
wind tempreture calibration
automatic current balancing calibration
attention: operators had better first read the HMI chapter and carry out the
procedure according to the explanations in that chapter.
2.17 De-exciter operation

The operations include:
The output exciation current calibrtion
The output excitation voltage calibration
The rotor temperature calibration
attention: operators had better first read the HMI chapter and carry out the
procedure according to the explanations in that chapter.
2.18 Interconnection of generator units

After successfully establishing the voltage of the generator, the in-phase apparatus
intrconnnection can be launched. Operators should keep a close eye on the reactive
8-20
power alteration after interconnection. Generally it is required that the positive

reactive value becomes smaller.
Attention: if the reactive power is negative, it might be that the terminal volage is
lower than the system voltage. Otherwise, reactive power is larger than rated value,
the terminal voltge is larger than the system voltage. In both of these occurrences,
the system voltage traching parameter should be modified.
2.19 Constant Q regulation or constant PF regulation

If operators want to choose this function, please enter the window of “opeation
mode set” on the regulator screen when the generator is operating with negative
charge. Or the controlling system gives command through the serial communication.
This regulation is realized through the change of voltage in the automatic voltage
regulator, which will work slowly in the operation. So if there are any problems in the
electricnet this function would not be affected.
At the moment of entering this mode, there would be no vibration. This is because
ahead of this the preset value is always the current value. After entring the mode, the
meaning of excitation de/in –crese has changed. Its function becomes to set the
reactive power or the power coefficient.
After entering into this mode, the exictaion system would automatically regulate
the excitation output according to the active power coefficient to make sure the value
set meets the requirement. This is done automatically. If there is increasing external
signals, the preset value would change accordingly.
In any of the following conditions, this function exits:
No internonnection command
Staotor current<10%rated value
Microcomputer manually operated
Regulator operats at channel C
2.20 Deviation coefficient setting

Enter into the window of “operational setup”, choose the function of “deviation
coefficient setting”, and enter the window of deviation coefficient setting.
8-21
There are 31 grades of the deviation rate. Click the display gram and there will be a
number input box. Click the numbers in this box and operator can set the deviation
coefficient rate. After the value setting click the botton “confirm” and see if the
feedback value agrees with the setting value.
Attention: the last step should never be negalected because if the feedback doesn’t
agree with the set one, the setting is invalid.
2.21 Power system stabilizer starting/stopping (PSS)

The PSS can resist the low-frequent vibration. After selecting the PSS, when the
power of the generator is larger than that of the PSS input power, the regulator would
turn on PSS automatically; if the genrator’s active power is lower than the PSS exit
power, the regulator would automatically exit the PSS. The regulating software, based
on the rated visual capacity of the generator, can set this. Before PSS operation, the
parameters should be set and tested by concerned professional.
The exit of PSS can be done through HMI in the regulator. The process as follows:
(1) In the window of the regulator screen, and select the item of “PSS operation”,
there would be a code emtry box.
8-22
(2) Input your code and clich “enter”. If the code is correct, the operator enters ointo
the operational window. Click the start and shut down of its functions, the PSS
operates.
(3) If the code is wrong, there would be a error dialogue box. At this moment the
users have to click the “go back” botton and return to the upper grade of the
menu.
2.22 Excitation system cutoff by generator units fault

In case of fault in generator units or excitation equipment, excitation system is
automatically cut off and de-excitation switch is switched off at the same time. After
the excitation system is cut off in case of fault, the local control display screen shall
display alarm. Professionals shall manage the fault. After the fault is eliminated, the
excitation system can be started again.
2.23 Analogue quantity display

Generally only excitation current and excitation voltage signals are transmitted
from exciter to the control room. Other displays required by running of the generator,
such as generator voltage, generator current, active power and reactive power etc are
provided by the system.
8-23
2.24 Statuses and alarm messages

There are a large amount of status information and alarm messages in excitation
system be transmitted to monitoring system with contact or through
commnunication modes. Corresponding see illustrations for detailed information.
The following signals are the most fundamental but not limited to these.
z Channel A is working
z Channel B is working
z Channel B is standby
z Channel C is working
z Channel C is standby
z Automatic mode
z Manual mode
z De-excitation switch Open
z De-excitation switch Close
z PSS Starting
z PSS Stopping
z Interconnection
z Constant power coefficient /constant reactive power regulation
z Over-excitation limit operation
z Force excitation operation
z Under excitation limit operation
z V/f limit operation
z Stator current limit operation
z PT fault: 1PT fault、2PT fault
z Overvoltage protection
z DC disappear
z AC disappear
z Flashing failure
z Reversion failure
8-24
z Set A fault: set A regulator fault, testing fault and power fault
z Set B fault: set B regulator fault, testing fault and power fault
z Set C fault
z Communication fault
z Pulse fault
z In-phase fault
z 1# power controller stopping
z 1# power controller fault (including fan fault, quick-reacting fuse blow,
wind temperature fault, pulse fault etc)
z 24V power fault: 24V set I fault、 24V set II fault
z CT fault
z Low exciatation current fault
z Low frequency
Besides, the signals sent out from the exciatation transformer controller
z Level 1 overtemperature alarm for excitation transformer
z Level 2 overtemperature tripping for excitation transformer
3. Running of the system

The following prerequisites about safe running shall be strictly adhered to.
• Firstly regulation shall be completed successfully.
• Maintenance shall be planned and done regularly.

8-25
• Any fault, which has occurred, has been completely eliminated.
• Any modification of set value (parameter) has been examined and tested.
3.1 Examination before starting

Before starting of excitation system, it shall be ensured that all required powers
have been working, that it can be started safety and that the following examinations
have been made.
• Maintenance of system has been completed.
• The control and power cubicle has been ready for working and properly
locked.
• The generator output is no-loaded. Input/output cable from excitation

transformer to exciter has been cut off (Temporary grounding wire disposed).
• Control power of De-excitation switch and regulator power have been on.
• No alarm and fault message has occurred.
• The excitation system has been switched to automatic mode.
The generator has reached rated rotating speed (check rotating speed on gauge
display).
3.2 Starting-up procedures

Operation Display Control
1 Field circuit breaker close Signal light on De-excitation switch

closed
2 Excitation system starts up Signal light on Voltage built up within

5-15 seconds
⇒ Generator no-load running
8-26
3 Excitation system prepares for low-load Generator voltage is

running. Select the excitaion regulated to set value.
decrease/increase button to regulate
generator voltage as same as power
network voltage.
4 When power network voltage and Reactive power of

generator voltage are synchronous, switch generator is close to
off the main circuit switch of generator. zero.
⇒ Generator low-load running

5 Select the excitation decrease/increase Regulate generator
button to set reactive power of voltage so that the
generator within desired running limits generator produces
certain reactive power.
3.3 Examination during running

During running process the following examinations shall be done regularly.
a) In the controlling room
• Running limiter no operation.
• Set value of running limiter does not reach the limit value.
• Channel tracking is done properly and switching is ready.
• Excitation current, generator voltage and reactive power are stable.
It is recommended that regulators be swiftly switched regularly manually to test

manual mode or standby channels.
b) Exciter
• No alarm operation
• No abnormal noise.
8-27
3.4 Stopping procedures

Operation Display Control
1 Generator disconnects with power grid：

- Reactive power is decreased by voltage set
value of generator.
– Active power is decreased by regulation of
steam or hydroelectric turbines.
– Main circuit switch of generator is switched
off.
2 Excitation system shutdown: Generator voltage

— Upon receipt of shutdown command, decreases to zero within
excitation system inverted de-excitation seconds.
—Terminal voltage is less than 10%. Excitation
devised initialized and wait for next startup.
3.5 Urgent stopping

In certain cases, faults in many peripheral types of equipment may incur a situation
where neither remote control nor a site control works in excitation system. In spite of
this, it shall also be possible to switch off excitation system. The urgent shutdown cuts
off genertor and excitation system but power in excitation system is not switched off.
Operators shall know how to shut it down in urgent situations.
4. Regulator panel indicating signal definitions

4.1 DSP board
Indicator light No. Function
L1 On when powered on
L2 Frequency in the machine set lower than
L3 Frequency in the machine set higher than
L4 Working flashing
L5 On when sampling
8-28
4.2 I/O board

Function Code No. DI No. CodeNo. Function
23 24 R671 Pulse error
21 22
Input of channel R695 19 20 R696 System tracking
tracking input
N04 17 18 Pressure built-up
from 0-load
Set B operation R662 15 16 R664 Set C operation
Channel address ADDS 13 14 R660 Set A operation
N03 11 12 TEST
Startup command R651 9 10 R653 Reversion
de-excitaiton
Electric brsking N01 7 8 N02
input
PSS on R692 5 6 R652 Circuit breaker
closed
BIN1 3 4 BIN2
Excitation R607 1 2 R611 Excitation
increse decrese
Function CodeNO. CodeNO. Function

Program 1 2 In-phase fault
modification
Over exciatation 3 4 Working flashing
PT fault PTB 5 6 R631 10% Ug
40%Ug R632 7 8 WDOG Fault testing
8-29
Users’ Guide＿＿＿＿Maintenance and fault handing
Chapter9 Maintenance and trouble

shooting

1.1 Safety rules............................................................................ 3
1.2 Consequences as result of negligence ................................... 4
1.3 Requirements with operators................................................. 4
1.4 Urgency illustrution .............................................................. 5
1.5 First-aid measures for electric devices .................................. 5
2. Open-loop test ....................................................................... 5

2.1 Wiring ................................................................................... 5
2.2 Safety measures..................................................................... 8
2.3 Requirements of maintainers................................................. 8
2.4 Urgency handling .................................................................. 9
3. Maintenance of excitation equipments ............................... 9

3.1 Brief introduction.................................................................. 9
3.2 Working conditions of maintenance.................................... 10
3.3 Maintenance schedule ......................................................... 10
3.4 Maintenance once every 3 months ...................................... 11
3.5 Maintenance once every year.............................................. 13
4. Fault handling ..................................................................... 15

4.1 Fault handling conditions.................................................... 15
9-1
4.2 Fault handling ..................................................................... 15
4.3Information table for excitation system fault and abnormal
conditions.................................................................................. 15
4.4 Technology consultation and server .................................... 27
9-2
1.1 Safety rules
There shall be alarming signs in case people may be working in the excitation
equipments. Otherwise any contact with electrified components may incur serious
personal injury. For this reason, protection measures shall be taken in design for those
components with 50V electrification in the equipments. Maintainers cannot enter into
the cabinet without certain training and necessary prevention measures.
The following illustration applies to special occasions for high voltage
excitation system.
Components (radiators, copper bars etc) in exciter, which are directly wired with
excitation transformer, subside and generator rotor field windings have extremely
high voltage and may constitute danger of electric shock in case of contact. For this
reason, safety barriers shall be installed to avoid accidental contact. For convenient
measuring of electric components in the equipment, this safety protection device shall
be a certain distance away from electrified object. Special care shall be taken that
maintainers should be subject to training, which is absolutely obligatory and
necessary.
Be careful! High voltage exists in the secondary of excitation transformer

and generator rotor field windings, it may result in
extremely great short circuit in exciter.
It must be pointed out that great danger of electric shock is existent because field
circuit breaker and discharge resistors of field circuit are directly wired with
generator rotator windings. For this reason, protection devices shall be installed in
cabinet to protect personal safety.
Maintainers shall keep away from any danger with high voltage and great current in
case of absence of protection devices.
There shall be alarm signs on the cabinet door to warn the maintainers of the
voltage (over 50V) in the cabinet, but the most important is to warn all people that the
9-3
voltage inside commutator may exceed 1000V and the current inside is quite great.
These alarm signs are also a protection measure in case the doors of controller are to
be opened during running process.
Signs Meanings
Danger! High voltage!
The maintenance cannot be done if the voltage is not cut off or if there are no
protection measures. Otherwise the following preventions shall be taken.
Casual approaching working area is forbidden. High voltage! Danger! Shall be
marked in yellow within safety area.
The switch, which has been switched off, may be switched on again due to control
error or other reasons. To avoid this, corresponding system protection measures shall
be taken (For example, the switch can not be switched without a key to avoid
mistaken switch-on again).
1.2 Consequences as result of negligence

Any noncompliance of the safety rules may incur serious damage to the equipment.
Warning! Be careful when the system is electrified without protection

measures in cabinet. It increases danger of electric shock
both to operators and to anyone close to the equipment.
If not all of the required maintenance work or only part of it has been done, it may
incur danger and great economic loss. Especially if there is still dirt or dust residual in
commutator, it may result in high-voltage flashover danger.
1.3 Requirements with operators

Maintainers shall be acquainted with relevant materials. They shall be acquainted
with installation operations and have been subject to training for maintenance and
repair.
They shall be acquainted with control theories and corresponding operations. They
9-4
shall be acquainted with not only excitation equipment themselves (local control), but
also alarms about excitation system in the control form (remote control, See Running
Guide).
They shall have abundant experience in excitation equipment power and accidents
like urgent shutdown etc and be capable of shutting down the system in case of
urgency.
They shall be acquainted with prevention measures against accident on working site
and they shall have been subject to first-aid and firefighting training.
1.4 Urgency illustrution

Fire
Workers shall know locations of fire extinguishers and urgent exits and be able to
use fire extinguishers. There are alone, CO2 and foam fire extinguishers.
CO2 fire extinguishers are specially used for fire on electric appliances and devices,
which constitutes no direct harm to human bodies.
Foam fire extinguishers are used for articles other than electric appliances and
devices. They have direct harm to human bodies.
In case of fire in the system, first the excitation shall be cut off on spot or in the
control room. And urgent shutdown device may be used if necessary (See Running
Guide). Then all powers in the system shall be cut off.
In case of fire in electrified cabinet, use CO2 fire extinguishers only. Do not
use foam or water!
1.5 First-aid measures for electric devices

First the excitation shall be cut off on spot or in the control room. Use urgent
shutdown device (See Running Guide) if necessary and then cut off all the powers in
the system. Rescue the wounded from place of danger, make them lie low on the
ground and give them systematic aid. Consider possible consequences to the electric
devices. Call for aid.
2. Open-loop test
The open-loop test is briefly stated as follows.
2.1 Wiring
Testing wiring can be done in the following two ways.
9-5
a) Untie the terminal and system back power supply is used. This approach, using
voltage transformer, current transformer, commutating transformer etc of excitation
system itself, may detect the whole excitation system. The wiring theory system
graph is as Graph 1.
励磁调节器
Graph 1 图5-1 励磁系统组成原理图
b) 3-phase transformer is used to simulate voltage transformer input and

rectification input. The wiring principal graph is as Graph 2.
代替同步信号输入
代替BV1信号
50V~100V
励磁调节柜厂电AC380V
代替整流桥输入
代替BV2信号
自励磁变副边
图 2 开环试验原理图(二)
图5-2
In approach a), generator terminal outlet 3-phase disconnects. The outlet cable or
BUSBAR should be electrified in test. Note that necessary safety measures should be
taken. In approach b), lead wire from terminal voltage transformer secondary side to
excitation regulator terminal should be removed and at the same time commutator AC
9-6
input switch should be switched off to avoid voltage transformation to transformer or

transformer primary side during test; In addition, if rectification subside rated voltage
is very high, the change rate should be regulated of synchronous former side input to
lower level to ensure normal synchronous signal when synchronous change input is
low. In both approaches, rotor cable shall be relieved from field circuit breaker outlet
and electric heater or resistor shall be wired in as load (Power should be taken
consideration of. Generally speaking, controlled silicon can be switched reliably into
conduction if the excitation current is 1A or up). When load is selected, attention shall
be paid to its capacity. When the controlled silicon is switched on to the full, DC side
output voltage may reach twice of rated excitation voltage. Wire in oscilloscope at
both terminals of load to observe the output waveform of controlled silicon. Take care
that when the output maximum voltage exceeds measuring range of oscilloscope,
damping resistors shall be considered to be wired in the circuit.
a. 当控制信号最大时 b.当控制信号最小时
Graph 3图5-3 开环试验励磁电压波形图
Open-loop test: Excitation regulator buttons are at on positions. Open-loop small

current tests are done respectively in Channel A, B and C. regulates the increased or
decreased buttons respectively in Channel A and B and observes output waveform on
oscilloscope. If output waveform of controlled silicon is normal, it should be
symmetrical unlack hexwave, which varies smoothly with set value (as per increasing
excitation or decreasing excitation) from minimum to maximum under control. The
9-7
sketch map is as shown in Graph 3.

Attention: for the detailed wiring way, operators can refer to chapter 7 appendix
2.
2.2 Safety measures

In the main circuit, due to the reason that one side of field circuit breaker is directly
connected with generator rotator, that input side of commutator are directly connected
with excitation change secondary circuit windings and that main circuit has high
voltage during running process of excitation equipments, the device, during normal
running process or testing, shall avoid contact with major circuit equipment to prevent
electric shocks. What’s worth noting is that there will be overvoltages in field circuit
breaker and rotor de-excitation circuit connected with it. So any contact shall be made
with them.
Maintenance and repair shall be made when the power in the equipment is
completely off. There would better be prominent warning lines in the working area to
prevent anybody other than operators to enter. For those breakers, field circuit breaker,
isolation switch etc that cannot be switched on, anti-mistaken-switch on measures
shall be taken, e.g. a sign like Someone Working Inside. Do not switch it on.” to avoid
mistaken operation and accident afterward.
Improper safety measures, such as mistaken switch on etc in maintenance, may not
only result in personal injury, but also result in damage to equipment, which will add
to maintenance expenses.
In addition, any negligence in maintenance of the equipment may affect its life span,
and its normal working if it is serious. For example, silicon components which have
not been dusted for a long time may incur Voltage flashover, affect insulation of the
main circuit etc and may result in equipment damage if it is serious.
2.3 Requirements of maintainers

● Maintainers and repairers shall be acquainted with relevant drawings
and materials.
● Maintainers shall have been subject to training or be acquainted with
9-8
operation and installation of the equipment with capability to complete

fully the maintenance and repairing work.
● Maintainers shall know meanings of various signals during running
process of the equipment as well as corresponding countermeasures if
handling is necessary.
● Maintainers shall be able to take urgent measures, such as switching off
field circuit breaker and cutting off power etc.
2.4 Urgency handling

First switch off the field circuit breaker and cut off all powers on excitation
equipments or connected to the equipments in the control form. In case of a fire, note
that CO2 fire extinguisher can be spayed directly to electric devices on fire but not
any person on fire. Foam fire extinguishers can be sprayed only to power-off electric
devices and persons on fire but not electrified ones.
Attension: for detailed information on open-loop test, operators can refer to chapter 7.
3. Maintenance of excitation equipments

Though most electrical components are not worn in spite of light aging, there are
still some electromechanical components, such as breakers, contactors, fans etc, with
mechanical wear and tear.
During running process of the equipments, fault system exercises fault detection
continually in running channel and standby channels. Even fault detecting system
itself will be detected. But fault-detecting system cannot guarantee to detect all the
faults, e.g. whether the relays are switched properly etc, so regular detection of
equipments are still necessary.
During regular examination, apart from cleaning of equipment components or
reassembly or fixing of components, following function examinations shall also be
executed.
Air circulation in power commutation makes it easy for the dust to accumulate on
silicon component surfaces. Air ventilation also accumulates dust in other circuits.
9-9
Vibration may loosen connecting places of terminals or other screws.

Due to the high voltage and great current existing in excitation circuit,
accumulation of dust on electric devices and electric conductors increases danger of
component damage incurred by voltage flashover. Regulator maintenance can greatly
decrease dangers like this.
3.2 Working conditions of maintenance

When maintenance is executed, please note conditions of the excitation system and
that different examining and maintaining items shall be done under different working
conditions.
Working condition (1), switch off all powers in excitation equipment and cut off all
electric connections.
Working condition (2), supply only plant power and DC.
Working condition (3), open-loop test conditions
Working condition (4), the equipment is running
3.3 Maintenance schedule

Sequence Items Once every month Once every year
No.
Excitation transformer
1 Excitation Check for dust, dirt and Check for dust, dirt and
transformer abnormal noise etc. abnormal noise etc.
Commutator
2 Fan Check dust, dirt, normal wind Check dust, dirt, normal wind
force and abnormal noise. force and abnormal noise.
3 Radiator, air Check dust, dirt, running Check dust, dirt, running
temperature etc. temperature etc.
4 Controlled Check all triggering circuits of
silicon controlled silicon。
De-exciter
5 Field circuit Check dirt, contacts, explosion
breaker chamber etc
6 Crowbar Check dust, dirt etc Check dust, dirt etc
7 De-excitation Check dust, dirt etc Check dust, dirt etc as well s
resistor soundness of protective fuse
（limited to non-linear resistor
de-excitation）。
9-10
Regulator
8 The circuit Check dust, dirt etc
board of
printed line
9 Function Channel switching (after short Check fault-switching function.
examination period of running standby
channel, it shall be switched back
to main channel for running.)
The items in the above table will be illustrated in detail in the following section.
The checking every three months and the checking every year are done separately.
In the former process no maintenance is done if there is no abnormal phenomenon and
actual maintenance is done in the latter process. Cleaning is not limited to items
described in the table but in the whole excitation system, including exciter casing and
construction parts etc.
During the first year after the system is put in use, the maintenance shall be done
strictly as schedules and be adjusted after a proper maintenance time interval based on
observation of the first year. The maintenance interval shall be shortened in case of
rapid accumulation of dust and prolonged in case of good running environment and
little dust.
3.4 Maintenance once every 3 months

Maintenance once every 3 months can be done under Working condition (4)
1. Excitation voltage transformer:
Check the dust and noise of excitation transformer.
2. Power commutator
Check to see if there is serious dirt on surface and blades of fan, if the air
ventilation is proper, if there is any abnormal noise. When it is not convenient to
dismantle the fan to lubricate the rotating shaft and when the noise increases evidently,
it may be replaced upon maintenance next time.
3. Standby fan:
In case there are two fans in the rectifier cubicle, the standby fan shall also be
examined upon examination during maintenance. Apart from regular examination, the
9-11
standby fan shall also be switched on to check to see if it runs properly and then the
main fan is switched on again. Generally speaking, if the fans are installed one above
the other, the one above is the main fan. In case of necessary replacement, the main
fan shall be replaced due to long running time and wear and tear consequently. During
replacement the standby fan need not be uninstalled. In case of damaged standby fan,
the main fan shall be uninstalled firstly and then the standby fan shall be uninstalled.
The above case does not exist if the fans are installed one on the right of the other or
one in front of the other.
Check the air filter on the cubicle door. It shall be replaced if it’s very dirty and
hard to clean.
4. Check radiator temperature (limited to intelligent rectifier cubicle only). Under
the condition of certain output voltage, current and environment, check temperature of
display. If there is evident difference between this temperature and the one recorded
under previous similar conditions, examine carefully the fun, radiator, dirt and dust on
dust filter etc.
5. Regulator
No abnormal signal is transmitted by the regulator; Data on the display, such as
excitation voltage, excitation current, generator active power, generator reactive
power, generator voltage etc as well as reading numbers on other gauges in the control
room should be within deviation scope. If data of A and B regulators are displayed,
the parameters of the two channels should be consistent (within deviation scope).
In case the regulator is a 3-channel system, usually A channel is selected to run as
the main channel. To ensure switching function and redundant channel function are
good and proper, proper switching among the 3 channels shall be checked.
When the channels are switched manually, the switching can not be executed unless
control signals of switched channel are the same with those of the running channel. In
normal situation, the terminal voltage or reactive power shall not be fluctuated
evidently after the switching is done. In case of great fluctuation it shall be switched
back to the original running channel and it shall be checked for causes.
9-12
3.5 Maintenance once every year

The maintenance once every year, based on the maintenance once every 3 months,
is illustrated as follows.
During this process, maintenance shall be particularly done to field circuit breaker.
First examine its appearance to check to see if there is any dirt or damage. Secondly
moving contacts, which are often subject to wear and tear, shall be examined. If field
circuit breaker is rarely operated, it shall be switched on and off to see if it moves
properly to avoid accidental lock.
1. Excitation transformer
Under working condition (1), clean dust and dirt etc off the appearance of
transformer and conductor joining parts with dry cloth, vacuum cleaner or compressed
air (pressure not too great). Do not use any solvent detergent.
2. Commutator
Under working condition (2) or (3), check dust, dirt, air ventilation and noise of fan
etc. Clean the fan if necessary.
Dust net. Dust filtering net shall be cleaned or replaced if it is too dirty.
Check radiator temperature (limited to intelligent rectifier cubicle only). Under
working condition (4), under certain environmental condition and certain voltage and
current, observed displayed temperature value. In case of evident increase in
temperature compared with before, repeat step 2, and then clean the radiator as per
working condition (1): Dust it and clean it with hair brush, vacuum cleaner or
compressed air (pressure not too great). Do not use any solvent detergent.
Check to see if triggering circuit runs normally. In case of normal running, the
automatic detecting circuit detects and monitors the triggering circuit. So a group of
pulse plugs may be pulled out in open-loop test to simulate pulse fault to see if the
detecting circuit can properly execute detection.
3. De-excitation circuit and field circuit breaker
Under working condition (1), check dust, dirt and contact cauterization. Clean the
switch itself with dry cloth or hairbrush. Open the explosion chamber and check the
9-13
contact. Polish the cauterized part with fine sand paper in case of cauterization. After
there is rated current on field circuit breaker and the current is shunted, check the
explosion chamber and contact. Blow the smoke away from the explosion chamber
with compressed air. Polish the contact if it is cauterized.
Examine screw joints under working condition (1), examine screw joints on copper
bar, check to see if the screws on joints of crowbar (limited to non-linear resistor
de-excitation only) fix properly.
Check for insulation problems incurred by dirt or screw loosening: Under working
condition (1), clean the joints with dry cloth if necessary. It is recommended that one
year after it is put in use for the first time, all screws including connection terminals
shall be screwed tight. Such operation may go once every four years after this.
4. Regulator
Check to see if the printed substrate is clean. Under working condition (1), clean
the line board with compressed air (pressure not too high).
Check for dust on base pins and on joints of pluggable components on circuit
boards. If there is, it may incur make the function of circuit board out of order. Clean
it with compressed air (the pressure not too great) or vacuum cleaner. Do not use any
solvent detergent.
Regulator function checking. Under working condition (4), check to see if control
board signals are normal, if IOP displayed values are normal and if the standby
channel works normally.
5. Open-loop test
If necessary an open-loop test shall be carried out as to the whole excitation system.
During the test, simulation may be done to the control circuit apart from checking
normality of excitation output waveform. Input, output signals etc may be simulated.
Simulation shall be done selectively as per electrical atlas and corresponding test
documents.
9-14
4. Fault handling
4.1 Fault handling conditions
Before fault handling starts, read 1.2 Safety Measures first. In case of replacement
of any component in the system, all excitation powers and all external electric
connections shall be cut off to ensure personal and equipment safety. Hot plugging is
forbidden.
Some components sensitive to static induction like CMOS component are easily
damaged if they are subject to static discharging. So keep away from them. In case of
replacement of such components or installation of circuit boards with these
components, first switch off the power and you would better wear sheaths on the
wrists for discharging during operation. In urgency, touch metal part with no paint in
the casing before operation to minimized danger of damage by static to the
component.
The new component to be put in use should better be provided by our company. All
spare parts have been examined at plant and can directly replace the original
component without jumping or setting etc.
4.2 Fault handling

In most cases, the normal functions in excitation system are continually monitored
by excitation fault monitoring system. In case of any fault in these functions, the
monitoring system will issue alarm signal and give fault details. For corresponding
fault handling please see the approaches described in the following fault handling
procedures.
4.3Information table for excitation system fault and

abnormal conditions
1. Flashing failure
Conditions: The terminal voltage stays <10% rated value after receiving the startup
command or the flashing command.
Corresponding status:
9-15
(1) “Initiation failure” shown on the screen

(2) The output point of “initiation failure” connected on the IO board
(3) The regulator would stop send out triggering pulse
Possible cause, check and handling:
(1) Check if the de-excitater switch is off
(2) Check if there’s remote or local reversion command
(3) Check if the DC current switch in the power controller is off
(4) Check if the pulse cut switch is in the position of “on”
(5) Check if the fuse is off
(6) Check if the excitation primary, secondary circuit is off
(7) Check if the rotor circuit is off
(8) Check if the excitaion power is on
(9) Check if the initiation contactor works in initiation
(10) The initiation resistor or diode off
(11) The regulator didn’t receive command of initiation: with the start up command,
the No. 9 indicator light on the I/O board is off
2.deviation failure
Conditions: In no-loaded condition, after deviation command holding 10s, generator
voltage larger 10%.
(1) Display on the regulator displays “deviation failure”.
(2) Output contacts “deviation failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) Regulator will bring deviation failure relay K03 operate and field circuit break
operate.
(1) Check if there is voltage in the PT circuit after stopping generator.
(2) Check if regulator deviation signal is normal.
3.PT failure
Conditions:
(1) A/B synchronization coefficient is equal to 0:
9-16
(2) A/B generator voltage is higher 10% rated voltage and one of 1PT /2PT measuring
voltage lower 83% of 3 phases average.
(3) A/B synchronization coefficient is unequal to 0:
(4) A/B syschronization generator is higher 20% rated voltage and higher 1PT/2PT
generator voltage and 10% rated voltage.
(1) Display on the regulator displays “1PT/2PT failure”.
(2) Output contacts “1PT/2PT failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) A/B channel will automatically switch to manual mode.
(4) A/B channel will automatically switch to standby channel for operating.
(1) Check 1PT/2PT voltage is normal.
(2) See if A/B measuring voltage in the display of the regulator is normal.
(3) See if A/B synchronization voltage is normal by regulating software.
4. A/B detecting failure
Conditions:
(1) A/B testing chips have hardware or software failure
(1) Display on the regulation diaplays “set A/B detecting failure”.
(2) Output contacts “set A/B detecting failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
(1) Restoring terminal 1 of Chip U18/U19 holds high voltage (>4.5V) on the switch
quantity board, change capacity C17/C16.
(2) Change XT13 on the switch quatity board.
(3) Change chip U18/U19 on the switch quatity board.
5. C regulator failure
Conditions:
When start up holds:
(1) Controlling chip of set C has hardware or software or power failure.
9-17
(2) C has synchronization failure.

(1) Display on the regulation displays “set C regulation failure”.
(2) Output contacts “set C regulation failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
(1) Check if set C synchronization signal is normal.
(2) Restoring terminal 1 of set C chip U6 on the analogue quantity board hoids high
voltage (>4.5V), maybe photoelectricity U3 is not welded.
Change XTAL or programme chip of set C.
6. A/B power failure
Conditions:
Output voltage of set A/B +5V switch power is abnormal (disappear or higher 5.25V)
or +12V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “A/B power failure”.
(2) Output contacts “A/B power failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) A/B regulator will automatically switch to standby channel.
(1) Measure if voltage of terminal X4:1/X4:9 and X4:3/X4:10 is normal or higher
5.25V.
(2) Measure if voltage of terminal X4:4/X4:13 and X4:3/X4:10 is disappear.
(3) Check if set A/B +5V&+12V switch power is normal.
7. A/B regulator failure
Conditions:
When R632 signal holds (generator voltage is higher 40%), set A/B regulator
hardware or software failure.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “A/B regulation failure”.
(2) Output contacts “A/B regulator failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
9-18
board.
(1) Restore A/B CPU board.
(2) A/B CPU fails and change.
(3) A/B DSP fails and change.
8. A/B pulse failure
Conditions:
Set A/B detecting chip on the switch quantity board detect one or more phase pulse
disappear when set A/B operate.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “A/B pulse failure”.
(2) Output contacts “A/B pulse failure” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if A/B synchronization signal is normal.
(2) A/B bring SCM failure or stopping work.change chip of pulse SCM.
(3) Check if crystalloid of A/B pulse on the switch quantity board.
9.DC 24V I section disappearance
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 80% rated voltage and regulator set I 24V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “DC 24V I section disappearance”.
(2) Output contacts “DC 24V I section disappearance” will contact on the
Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if terminal voltage of set I 24V is normal.
(2) Check if output voltage of secondary wrings of synchronization transformer is
normal.
(3) Check if 24V output of set I 24V is normal, may be switch power failure, change
9-19
it.
10. DC 24V II section disappearance
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 80% rated voltage and regulator set II 24V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “DC 24V II section disappearance”.
(2) Output contacts “DC 24V II section disappearance” will contact on the
(1) Check if terminal voltage of set II 24V is normal.
(2) Check if 24V output of set I 24V is normal, may be switch power failure, change
it.
11. AC power disappearance
Conditions:
Plant power set I&II disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “AC disappearance”.
(2) Output contacts “AC disappearance” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if all the AC breakers in plant power supply circuit are switched on.
(2) Check if AC relative contacter is operated.
(3) Check if external plant power is normal.
12.DC disappear
Conditions:
DC setIorII disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “DC disappearance”.
(2) Output contacts “DC disappearance” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if external output DC power is normal at external wiring terminals.
9-20
(2) Check if 220V DC at voltage external wiring terminals of fuse or breaker in DC

power circuit.
13. Field circuit breaker Mis-opening
Conditions:
When networking of generator holds，and Field circuit breaker break down.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Field circuit breaker Mis-opening ”.
(2) Output contacts “DC disappearance” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if breaker at generator exit is ON.
(2) Check if field circuit breaker is OFF.
14. Overexcitation protection
Conditions:
Excitation current measured on analogue quantity board bigger overexcitation
protection value.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Field circuit breaker Mis-opening ”.
(2) Output contacts “Overexcitation protection” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
Overexcitation protection relay K04 will operate, output contacts send signal or stop.
(1) Check if there is short circuit in rotor circuit.
(2) Check if there is short circuit in the recitifier.
15. Over voltage protection operation
Conditions:
(1) Non-balanced phase operation brings over voltage protection operation in rotor
circuit.
(2) When field circuit breaker operation and de-excitation.
9-21
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Over voltage protection operation ”.

(2) Output contacts “Over voltage protection operation” will contact on the
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of de-exciter displays “”, or signal light lights.
Regulator will cutoff A phase pulse signal.
(1) When break down field circuit breaker is normal because of some cause.
(2) When generator sets work in non-balanced phase, overvoltage will come out and
is normal.
16. A/B synchronization failure
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 40%, A/B synchronization voltage higher 20%, but lower
0.85 times A/B PT voltage.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “setA/B synchronization failure ”.
(2) Output contacts “setA/B synchronization failure” will contact on the
(3) A/B will automatically switch to the standby channel.
(4) If contact JP1 jump on the switch quantity board, protection relay K04 will
operate.
Check A/B if 3-phase synchronization voltage is normal.
17.Underexcitation
Conditions:
When it is working by A/B channel: generator current is higher 10% excitation
current, and lower 20% no-loaded excitation current.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “underexcitation ”.
(2) Output contacts “underexcitation” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) If contact JP1 jump on the switch quantity board, protection relay K04 will
9-22
operate.
(4) There is “underexcitation” when it is operating in working channel.
Regulator working channel failure or excitation system failure brings generator loss
excitation current. Hanld: switch to standby channel and check if regulator is normal
working.
18.Excitation transformer CT failure
Conditions:
When it is working by A/B channel: generator voltage is higher 80%, excitation
current lower 10% rated current, and synchronization voltage parameter unequal to 0.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Excitation transformer CT failure ”.
(2) Output contacts “Excitation transformer CT failure” will contact on the
(1) Check if C channel control signal is normal. When excitation transformer CT
failure, C channel current feedback signal will be small.
(2) Check if excitation transformer CT circuit is normal.
19. Communication failures
Conditions:
Including A Regulator Communication failure, B Regulator Communication failure,
１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier Communication failure, de-exciter Communication failure,
Intelligent I/O Panel Communication failure etc.
Display on the regulation displays “Communication failures”.
Output contacts “Communication failures” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
20.１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier cubicle fan power failure
Conditions:
There is R651 command or starting fan command.
9-23
(1) Display on the regulation displays “１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier cubicle fan power
failure ”.
(2) Output contacts “１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier cubicle fan power failure” will contact
on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier
cubicle fan power failure” and holds.
(1) Restrore on the screen of rectifier and check if “１＃(2#、3#、4#) rectifier cubicle
fan power failure” signal disappear.
(2) Check if fan power circuit is normal.
(3) Check if fan stop or slow on the rectifier.
21.１＃(2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast fuse blow
Conditions:
Any fuse on the intelligentized board of rectifier blow.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “１＃(2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast
blow ”.
(2) Output contacts “１＃(2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast blow” will
contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“１＃(2#, 3#, 4#)
rectifier cubicle fast blow”.
(1) Check if 6-fuse red director is out. If it is out , fuse is fail.
22. 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind overtemperature
Conditions:
Wind temperature exceed prevalue on the rectifier.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind
overtemperature”.
9-24
(2) Output contacts “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind overtemperature” will
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
cubicle wind overtemperature”.
(1) Measure if circumstance temperature is higher 40ºC.
(2) Check if output current and brige arm current of rectifier is overhigh.
(3) Check if fan stops. If it stops and other rectifier works normally, cutoff the pluse of
the rectifier. Check if fan power disappears or if fan stops.
23.1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and capacitance failure
Conditions:
Fuse direction contacts in the RC protection circuit of rectifier break.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and
capacitance failure”.
(2) Output contacts “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and capacitance failure” will
Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
resistence and capacitance failure”.
If generator works normally, cutoff pulse of rectifier and stop working. Best check as
following processes:
(1) Check if commute diode in the RC circuit shortcircuit.
(2) Check if sorb capacitance break in the RC protection circuit.
24.1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm current stop
Conditions:
When output current of rectifier is higher 200A and generator voltage higher 40%,
corresponding phase (+A, +B, +C, –A, –B, -C ) crystalloid current is lower preset
value. (generally 5A)
9-25
(1) Display on the regulation displays “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm
current stop”.
(2) Output contacts “1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm current stop ” will
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
cubicle bridge arm current stop”.
25.Rectifier is out
Conditions:
Rectifier pluse cutoff switch is “ON”.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Rectifier is out”.
(2) Output contacts “Rectifier is out ” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(4) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays“Rectifier is out”.
Check if pulse cutoff switch is in the condition of cutoff.
26. Commuter failure (corresponding to conventional rectifier)
Conditions:
When each failure comes out following:
(1) Fuse blow of rectifier.
(2) When startup command holds, fan power disappear of rectifier.
(3) Pulse board check pulse failure.
(1) Display on the regulation displays “Commuter failure”.
(2) Output contacts “Commuter failure ” will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(4) “Fuse blow or fan stop” light will be light on the door of rectifier.
(1) See if “fuse blow”,”fan stop” light is light, lighting means corrrsponding light
failure and check corresponding controlling and detecting circuit.
(2) If light is normal on the door of rectifier, it is maybe pulse failure. we can change
DK201board.
9-26
4.4 Technology consultation and server

If the fault can not be eliminated, call the following telephone for aid.
Technology Dept.: 08620-84197844，84451171-522；
Project Dept.: 020-84451171-268,227, 020-8418947;
Postcode: 510300
E-mail: lici@china-exciter.com
9-27
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Communication with the surveillance system
Chapter10 Communication with the

surveillance system
1.Setup of the communication interface ................................. 2

2.Communication agreement................................................... 2
2.1 read the system status............................................................ 2
2.2 Constant reactive power regulation of the preset value......... 3
2.3 Constant reactive power regulation of the current working
status ........................................................................................... 3
2.4 The constant reactive power regulation exits ........................ 4
2.5 The preset value enters the constant power coefficient......... 4
2.6 The current working status enters the constant power
coefficient ................................................................................... 4
2.7 Constant power coefficient exits ........................................... 5
2.8 Set value getting into time calibration................................... 5
2.9 Fixed value getting into time calibration............................... 5
2.10 Time value setting ............................................................... 6
2.11 Modbus communication order............................................. 6
2.12 Given reactive power value................................................. 6
2.13 Given power factor.............................................................. 7
3.Output status definition table for the excitation system..... 7
10-1
The interface connecting EXC9000 system and LCU monitoring system is flexible,
which might be the conventional relay contactor, and can be the communicative mode,
or the net combination through the BUS. What’s more, the above ways can be mixed.
Users can choose what ever they like.
In recent years, as the full development of excitation regulator, the connection with
the monitoring system has adopted the serial wiring way. This system specially
develops an intelligent IO board and the special programmable chip, for the use of
handling the serial communication in the monitoring system. According to the
current demand of power plants and monitoring system we develop the MODBUS
special program matching with the agreement. The hard ware of the interface is the
RS485 interface, advanced and suitable for long distance transportation.
1.Setup of the communication interface

The excitation system and the monitoring system adopt the Modbus communication
agreement. Our company supports the RTU mode. The setup out-of-factory as the
following:
The electric interface standard: RS485
Station No. 1
Communicative mode: RTU
Baud rate: 9600bit/s
Data bit: 8
Stop bit: 1
Check bit: no check
The station No., the baud rate, the stop bit, the check bit can be changed on the spot
2.Communication agreement
The agreements are:
2.1 read the system status

Command:
Station No Function No. Initial point Length CRC check bit
01 03 0000 000A CRC16
10-2
Reaction format
Station No. Function No. Data length Content of Content of CRC check bit
0000 000A
01 03 14 XXXX XXXX CRC16
Register Definition Data Data range Actual Remarks

0000 Excitation voltage 16 0~XXXX 0~XX.XX Actual
0001 Excitation current 16 0~XXXX 0`XX.XX Actual
0002 Rotor temperature 16 0~XXXX 0~XX.XX Actual
0003 R0~R15 16 Switch
0004 R16~R31 16 Switch
0005 R32~R47 16 Switch
0006
007
008
009
The definition of R0~R47 are detailed in this chapter “3.the definition of the output
status”.
2.2 Constant reactive power regulation of the preset value

Write 1 in the 0000register, the excitation system would enter into the constant
reactive power regulation on condition. Conditions: whenever the system enters into
this state, the reactive power value should be reset or the command would be invalid.
Command:
Station No Function No. Initial point Write 1 CRC check
01 05 0000 FF00 8C3A
Reaction format
Station No. Function No. Initial address Write 1 CRC check bit
01 05 0000 FF00 8C3A
2.3 Constant reactive power regulation of the current
working status
Write 1 in the 0001register, the excitation system would enter into the constant
reactive power regulation without conditions. Conditions: whenever the system enters
into this state, the reactive power value set as the current reactive power value.
10-3
Command:
Station No Function No. Initial point Write 1 CRC check bit
01 05 0001 FF00 DDFA
Reaction format
01 05 0001 FF00 DDFA
2.4 The constant reactive power regulation exits
Write 0 to the address 0000, the excitation system exit the reactive power
regulation.
Command:
01 05 0000 0000 CDCA
Reaction format
01 05 0000 0000 CDCA
2.5 The preset value enters the constant power coefficient
Write 1 to address 0002, the excitation system would enter the running mode of
constant power coefficient. Before the operation, the power coefficient should be first
set, or the command would be invalid.
Command:
01 05 0002 FF00 2DFA
Reaction format
01 05 0002 FF00 2DFA
2.6 The current working status enters the constant power
coefficient
Write 1 to the register 0003, the excitation system would enter the state of current
power regulation, the power coefficient being the current one
Command:
01 05 0003 FF00 7C3A
10-4
Reaction format
01 05 0003 FF00 7C3A
2.7 Constant power coefficient exits
Write 0 to the address 0002, the excitation system would exit the state of constant
coefficient regulation.
Command:
01 05 0002 0000 CRC16
Reaction format
01 05 0002 0000 CRC16
2.8 Set value getting into time calibration
Writing 1 into address 0004, excitation system will be able to carry out the time
checking function of set value. Premise: every time gets into the time checking
condition, it must be reset, otherwise the order is ineffective.
Order:
Station Function Original Write 1 16 digit CRC checking
01 05 0004 FF00 CDFB
Response:
01 05 0004 FF00 CDFB
2.9 Fixed value getting into time calibration
Writing 1 into register 0005, excitation system will be able to carry out the time
checking function of fixed value. The fixed time is 08:00:00.
Order:
01 05 0005 FF00 9C3B
Response:
01 05 0005 FF00 9C3B
10-5
2.10 Time value setting

Write the 4digit hexadecimal number into address 0002, it is the set value of power
factor.
Order:
Station Function Original Write 1 Write 16 digit CRC
01 06 0002 XX XX CRC16
Response:
01 06 0002 XX XX CRC16
Number 1 is the “hour” set value; the scope of hexadecimal data is 0 to 17
Number 2 is the “minute” set value; the scope of hexadecimal data is 0 to 3B
The “second” set value is automatically 0 after every time setting.e.g. set time as
23:59, thus 0.
Order:
01 06 0002 17 3B 6629
Response:
01 06 0002 17 3B 6629
2.11 Modbus communication order
Write AA55 into register 0000
Order:
Station number Function Original Write 1 16 digit CRC checking
01 08 0000 AA55 5E94
Response:
Station number Function Original Write 1 16 digit CRC checking
01 08 0000 AA55 5E94
Remarks: this order is not the necessary order of excitation system.
2.12 Given reactive power value

Write the 4 digit hexadecimal number into address 0000, it is the reactive power set
value.
Order:
10-6
Station number Function Original Write 16 digit CRC

01 06 0000 XXXX CRC16
Response:
01 06 0000 XXXX CRC16
The number is from 0 to 10000, the data type is integer, means 0～100.00Sn.
According to Modbus agreement, it is prior to send the high-digits and inferior to send
the low-digits.
2.13 Given power factor

Write the 4 digit hexadecimal number into register 0001, it is the set value of power
factor.
Order:
01 06 0001 XXXX CRC16
Response：
01 06 0001 XXXX CRC16
The number is from 0 to 10000, the data type is integer, means 0～1.0000Sn. It is
prior to send the high-digits and inferior to send the low-digits.
3.Output status definition table for the excitation system

The definitions of R0~R47 provided for the monitoring system should be matched
with the actual position in the IO board rationale diagram. The intelligent IO
definition can be used to modify the definition of R0~R47 on the IIU.
The corresponding relationship of the definition position and the R0~R47
X1terminal Corresponding Corresponding X6terminal
1 R0 R47 20
2 19
3 R1 R46 18
4 17
5 R2 R45 16
6 15
7 R3 R44 14
8 13
10-7
9 R4 R43 12
10 11
11 R5 R42 10
12 9
13 R6 R41 8
14 7
15 R7 R40 6
16 5
Attention: the definitions of R0~R47 provided for the engineers should be matched
with the actual position in the IO board rationale diagram with accuracy. If there’s
modification in any of the R0~R47, the definition in the monitoring system should be
modified accordingly.
10-8
Users’ guide＿＿＿＿Electronic generation function
Chapter11 Electronic braking function
1.Brief introduction ......................................................................... 2
2.Rationale for the electric braking ............................................... 2
3.Circuit for electric braking .......................................................... 3
4.Working procedure of electric braking ...................................... 4
5.The output current control of the excitation system.................. 7
11-1
1.Brief introduction
Our company has a great knowledge and rich experience in the electric braking
device. On the basis of the excitation system, taking the users needs into
consideration, we develop the function of electric braking from the soft ware, named
the soft electric braking.
This function of electric braking can only be applied to the water turbine.
2.Rationale for the electric braking

After the breaking of generator and de-excitation, when the spinning speed of the
machine drops to 50%~60%, operators short circuit3-phase the stator at the terminal
exit. After a serious of logic operation, the power for electric braking is supplied.
The regulator turns to the electric braking mode and adds rotor current to the rotors.
Because the generator is spinning, the stators would create short-circuit current. The
moment direction is due opposite to the rotors inertance, playing the role of electric
braking.
There 2 main distinguished characteristics of electric braking:
(1) The electric braking moment is proportionate to the square current of the stator
short circuit.
(2) The electric braking moment is inverse proportionate to the spinning speed of the
machine unit. In the process of electric braking, the stator short circuit current
remains almost the same, so as the spinning speed drops, the electric braking
moment increases. When the machine units stop spinning, the moment reaches it
maximum value.
According to the above characteristics, in order to get the most moment, we should
make full use of the stator capacity to make the stator short circuit current equal to the
rated stator current. In order to get the rated stator current, the excitation current
should reach the 0-loaded generator excitation current.
The electric braking is generally started at the 60% of the rated spinning speed, the
command sent by the monitoring system. The PLC would finish the concrete steps of
electric braking procedure.
11-2
In the electric braking process, the regulator is in the manual mode. The excitation
system sends out the constant excitation current to the rotors.
The current set value can be set through the commissioning software.
3.Circuit for electric braking

In the process of electric braking, external power is needed, which is closely related
to the structure of the main circuit in the excitation system. Generally there are 2
ways of wiring, see graph 11-1 and graph 11-2.
Graph 11-1 self and parallel wring mode
Graph 11-2 other-excitation wring mode
In the graph 11-1, the excitation equipments are wired in the way of self-parallel. If
there is short circuit, the whole circuit is powered off. The electric braking power
supply comes from a special electric braking voltage transformer; the power is from
the factory. That is to say, in condition of generating and electric braking, the
11-3
rectifier power needs to be switched on and off through the QL1 and QL2.
In the graph 11-2, the wiring way is other-excitation wring. i.e. the voltage
transformer locates outside the circuit breaker in the generator. In conditions of
generating electricity or electric braking, the rectifier power is supplied by the
excitation change. Compare the 2 ways, the way of graph 2 is simpler, which does
away with the voltage transformer and the circuit breaker, and thus with a more
concise logic.
Under the mode of self-parallel excitation of the generator, the excitation change is
generally originated from the generator terminal; in this way the way of graph one is
more popular. In the electric braking process, the excitation current provided to the
rotors from the system would not exceed the 0-loaded rated excitation current. As a
result, the capacity of the electric braking change can be selected at a small amount.
4.Working procedure of electric braking

The working procedure of electric braking is realized through PLC, which plays an
important role in the process of the whole procedure. Take the graph 11-1 as an
example, to show the working procedure of electric braking.
PLC fulfills the following functions:
(1) Check the conditions for the electric braking to start
When it is normally stopped, the generator has some connection with the system,
the monitoring system sends out stop command to the regulator; the regulator would
reverse for de-excitation. Generally speaking, when the following conditions are
met, the monitoring system sends out command of electric braking.
a) The circuit breaker at the generator exit switch off
b) The command of machine unit stop
c) The guide blades all closed
d) The machine units without accidents
e) The spinning speed drops to less than 60% of rated value
(2) When the conditions are met for the input of electric braking, the PLC locks the
relay protection, the switch QL1, and the switch RES, and the switch QL2.
11-4
(3) The excitation regulator transfer to the mode of electric braking so that the
excitation system send current to the rotors, forming a moment to finish the
electric braking process.
(4) In the process, if any step doesn’t meet the requirement, the PLC would send
signals to begin mechanical brake as well as alarm to the monitoring system. The
electric braking function exits, and at the same time enter step 7.
(5) When the spinning speed of the rotors is less than 5%, the electric braking is
finished. The PLC sends de-excitation signals to the regulator, after the success of
de-excitation, enter step 7.
(6) Reversion failure, the PLC switch off the de-excitater, then enters the step 7.
(7) When steps3~steps 6 are finished, PLC sends signals to switches QL2, RES, and
QL1, the relay protector is released, the excitation system remains at the state
before it is normally turned on.
In the electric braking process, PLC has continuously monitored the normality of
this process. When met with the following problems, the PLC would send alarm
signal to the monitoring system, and exit the process. At this moment, the monitoring
system is input to finish the electric braking in the machine units.
a) QL1 could not be switched off, or RES, QL2 could not be switched on
b) The long period of electric braking.
11-5
11-6
5.The output current control of the excitation system

Considering the different running conditions of different power plants, in the
process of electric braking, the excitation current is not all the same. For the
convenience of regulating the current output, the parameter in the commissioning
software ID [91] can be modified, which is good for the regulation of on site current
needed for the circuit.
Channel C hasn’t got the function of electric braking. If channel C is at work, the
electric braking command is started, the command of failure of electric braking would
be sent out.
11-7
Users’ guide＿＿Digital model and logic control
Chpter12 Digital model and logic control
1.Digital Model of Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) .............. 2
1.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function.................................... 2
1.2 Brief Introduction.................................................................. 2
2.Digital Model of Power System Stability (PSS).......................... 3
2.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function of PSS2A ................... 3
2.2 Brief Introduction of PSS2A................................................. 3
3.Controlling Logic of Automatic Voltage Regulate ..................... 5
4.Controlling Logic of Constant Excitation Current Regulate.... 6
5.Controlling Logic of Forced & Overexcitation Limit................ 7
6.Controlling Logic of Deviation Regulation & Underexcitation
Limit ................................................................................................. 7
7.Controlling Logic of V/Hz............................................................ 8
8.Controlling Logic of Signals’ Comprehensive Output............... 8
9.Controlling Logic of Power System Stability ............................. 9
10.Controlling Logic of Testing Simulation................................. 10
11.PT fault & synchronous Fault Test.......................................... 11
12.PPS Controlling Logic of Non-linear Robust ......................... 12
12-1
1.Digital Model of Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)

1.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function
1.2 Brief Introduction

All testing results are calculated by DSP samples, as time constants are equal,
expressed by TR.
Reactive compensation is regulated by KIR, active compensation is regulated by
KIA.
The main control has a link of two-stage outstrip and one delay, TA1, TA3 each is
outstrip time constant, TA2 and TA4 each is delay time constant. Stable increase is
regulated by KR While TA1=TA2=0, this link will out of use.
The phase-shifting scope of convert bridge is 10°to 150°,and the limit value of
excitation voltage can be calculated by rated positive voltage.
Parameter Setting
definition Brief introduction Unit Scope Typical
TR Testing time constant second 0.020 0.010
12-2
Ts Convert bridge time second 0.004 0.004

KIR Reactive compensation 标么 -0.15…+0.15 +0.06
KIA Active compensation 标么 -0.15…+0.15 0.00
KR Stable increase 标么 10…1000 200
TA2 First stage delay time second 0<TA2≦TA1 0
TA4 Second stage delay time secon TA4≧TA2 4.0
constant
TA1 First outstrip time second 0…2 0
TA3 Second outstrip time second 0.01…10 1.0
Ufmax Maximum excitation 标么 fixed …
Ufmin Minimum excitation 标么 fixed -0.9* Ufmax
2.Digital Model of Power System Stability (PSS)
2.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function of PSS2A
2.2 Brief Introduction of PSS2A

While taking the model test, signals of PSS_0、PSS_1、PSS_2、PSS_3、PSS_4、
PSS_5、PSS_UK can be output by D/A.
Parameters with switch characteristic:
·when TW2=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
12-3
·when TW4=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
·when TW1＝TW2=0, the total output of two polarized stopping direct
current link will always be 0.
·when TW3＝TW4=0, the total output of two polarized stopping direct
current link will always be 0.
·when T7=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
·when T9=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
PSS2A parameter setting.
Definition Brief introduction Unit Scope Typical value
TW1,TW2 Stopping direct current time Second 0.1…30 TW1=2
constant TW2=2
TW3,TW4 Gate control unit and Second 0.1…30 TW3=2
Ks1 PSS increase 0.1…50 …

Ks2 Compensation factor of 0.01…5 …
electronic power integral
Ks3 Signal match factor 0.01…5 1
T1,T3 outstrip time constant Second 0.00…2.50 T1=…
T2,T4 Delay time constant Second 0.00…2.50 T2=…
T7 Electronic power integral Second 3…30 …
i
T8 Wave trap time constant Second 0.00…2.50 0.00
T9 Wave trap time constant Second 0.00…2.50 0.10
M Wave trap order - 2…5 …
N Wave trap order - 1…2 1
USTmax Positive limit 0.01…0.2 0.1
USTmin Negative limit 0.01…0.2 - USTmax
P1 PSS input power 0.1…0.9 0.4
P2 PSS quit power 0.1…0.9 0.35
12-4
3.Controlling Logic of Automatic Voltage Regulate
12-5
4.Controlling Logic of Constant Excitation Current Regulate
12-6
5.Controlling Logic of Forced & Overexcitation Limit
6.Controlling Logic of Deviation Regulation &

Underexcitation Limit
12-7
7.Controlling Logic of V/Hz
8.Controlling Logic of Signals’ Comprehensive Output
12-8
9.Controlling Logic of Power System Stability
12-9
10.Controlling Logic of Testing Simulation
12-10
11.PT fault & synchronous Fault Test
12-11
12.PPS Controlling Logic of Non-linear Robust
12-12

New9000English Mannual PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

New9000English Mannual PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

EXC9000 STATIC EXCITATION

GUANGZHOU ELECTRICAL APARATUS

Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Chapter 2 System composition

Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations

Chapter 4 Human-machine interface

the explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed

Chapter 5 Regulation software

Chapter 6 Installation guide

Measure for emergency.

Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting

Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system

Chapter 11 Electronic braking function

Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control

Chapter 2 System composition

1. Models & Specifications ....................................................... 5

3.2 Hardware of regulators........................................................... 10

3.2.1 Block diagram of hardware....................................................10

3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)..........................................10

3.2.3 Main CPU Board....................................................................12

3.2.3.1 main functions.................................................................12

3.2.3.2 main components and technique Specifications .............12

3.2.3.3 the definition and function of jumper and linker ............13

3.2.4 DSP Board..............................................................................15

3.2.4.1 main functions.................................................................16

3.2.4.2. Characteristics and technique indicator .........................16

3.2.4.3 Functional definition of linkers and indicator lights.......17

3.2.5 I/O Board................................................................................19

3.2.5.1 Main functions ................................................................19

3.2.5.2 main characteristics and technical indicators..................20

3.2.5.3 definition of linkers and indicators .................................21

3.2.6 Analogue quantity board ........................................................24

3.2.6.1 Main functions ................................................................24

3.2.6.2 Manual Channel C ..........................................................24

3.2.6.3 Definition of ports and linkers in the analogue quantity

3.2.7 Switch quantity BUS board ...................................................32

3.2.7.1 Main functions ................................................................32

3.2.7.2 definition for wiring terminal and linkers on the switch

quantity BUS board.....................................................................33

3.2.8 LOU Board.............................................................................41

3.2.8.1 Main functions ................................................................41

3.2.8.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers................42

3.2.9 Intelligent IO board ................................................................44

3.2.9.1 Main functions ................................................................44

3.2.9.2 Definition for wiring terminals and linkers on the IO

3.2.10 The human-machine interface in the regulator ---color liquid

crystal touch screen .........................................................................48

3.2.10.1 main functions...............................................................48

3.3 Power supply.......................................................................... 48

4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle.......................................... 49

4.2 The major components of each rectifier cubicle..................... 50

4.3 Intelligent rectifier cubicle ..................................................... 50

4.3.1 intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle ..........................51

4.3.1.1 Main functions ................................................................51

4.3.1.2 definition of wiring terminal and linkers on the rectifier

4.3.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers of impulse

4.3.3 control of the intelligent rectifier cubicle .............................57

4.4 Pulse formation ...................................................................... 59

4.5 intelligent current balancing................................................... 60

4.6 Pulse transformer.................................................................... 61

4.7 Long-distance transmission of pulse ...................................... 61

4.8 R-C protection ........................................................................ 61

测量元件 B套调节器操作元件

模拟量总线开关量总线人机接口

RJ –45 Ethernet interface

Single channel gathering frequency: 500KHz

Input electric resistance: 4.7KΩ